# Glossary (/en/guides/glossary)
Use this glossary to clarify Qboxmail product names, Email Delivery concepts, DNS terminology, roles, and API terms used across the documentation.
# Welcome (/en/guides/welcome)
# Delete addressbook (/en/api/deleteApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete contact (/en/api/deleteApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookIdContactsUid)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete Vault domain (/en/api/deleteApiArchiveDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete Vault email account (/en/api/deleteApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete Delivery account (/en/api/deleteApiDeliveryAccountsId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete Delivery API token (/en/api/deleteApiDeliveryAccountsIdApiTokensTokenId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete Delivery domain (/en/api/deleteApiDeliveryDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete domain (/en/api/deleteApiDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete email alias (/en/api/deleteApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasEmailAccountsAliasEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete domain alias (/en/api/deleteApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Disable DKIM (/en/api/deleteApiDomainsDomainCodeDkim)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete email account (/en/api/deleteApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete export (/en/api/deleteApiExportsId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete import (/en/api/deleteApiImportsImportCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete manager (/en/api/deleteApiManagersManagerCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Unassign delivery resources from manager (/en/api/deleteApiManagersManagerCodeAssignDeliveryId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete migration (/en/api/deleteApiMigrationsMigrationCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete email signature (/en/api/deleteApiSignaturesCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete identity signature (/en/api/deleteApiSignaturesCodeIdentity)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete team member (/en/api/deleteApiTeamMembersTeamMemberCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List addressbooks (/en/api/getApiAddressbooksCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List contacts (/en/api/getApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookIdContacts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get contact (/en/api/getApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookIdContactsUid)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Vault domains (/en/api/getApiArchiveDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Vault email accounts (/en/api/getApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get Vault email account (/en/api/getApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Delivery accounts (/en/api/getApiDeliveryAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get TraceMail domain ranking (/en/api/getApiDeliveryAccountsAccountDomainsRank)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get Delivery account (/en/api/getApiDeliveryAccountsId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Delivery API tokens (/en/api/getApiDeliveryAccountsIdApiTokens)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Delivery dashboard alerts (/en/api/getApiDeliveryDashboardAlertsSeverity)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List Delivery domains (/en/api/getApiDeliveryDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get Delivery domain (/en/api/getApiDeliveryDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get Delivery prices (/en/api/getApiDeliveryPrices)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get Delivery pricing page (/en/api/getApiDeliveryPricesPage)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List suppression list entries (/en/api/getApiDeliverySuppressionLists)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List TraceMail accounts (/en/api/getApiDeliveryTracemailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get TraceMail counters (/en/api/getApiDeliveryTracemailCounters)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get TraceMail daily statistics (/en/api/getApiDeliveryTracemailDailyAccount)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List TraceMail domains (/en/api/getApiDeliveryTracemailDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List TraceMail mailouts (/en/api/getApiDeliveryTracemailMailouts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List domains (/en/api/getApiDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get domain (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List email aliases (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get email alias (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasEmailAccountsAliasEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List domain aliases (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeAliases)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get domain alias (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List email accounts (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get email account (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List email account outbound limit options (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailAccountCodeOutboundLimits)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List domain outbound limit options (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeOutboundLimits)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List accounts without signatures (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeSettingsNoSignature)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get signature template variables (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeSettingsSignatureTemplates)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List trusted networks (/en/api/getApiDomainsDomainCodeSettingsTrustedNetworks)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List domains without customization (/en/api/getApiDomainsNoCustomizations)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List domains without manager (/en/api/getApiDomainsNoManagers)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List postmasters (/en/api/getApiDomainsPostmasters)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List access logs (/en/api/getApiEtliveAccesses)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List incoming mail logs (/en/api/getApiEtliveMailins)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List outgoing mail logs (/en/api/getApiEtliveMailouts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List imports (/en/api/getApiImports)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Download import CSV file (/en/api/getApiImportsImportCodeFile)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List import resources (/en/api/getApiImportsImportCodeResources)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List managers (/en/api/getApiManagers)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get manager (/en/api/getApiManagersManagerCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List migrations (/en/api/getApiMigrations)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration run log (/en/api/getApiMigrationsLogRunCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Download migration CSV file (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCodeFile)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List migration resources (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCodeResources)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration resource log (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCodeResourcesResourceCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration run (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCodeRunsRunCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration stats (/en/api/getApiMigrationsMigrationCodeStats)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List migration presets (/en/api/getApiMigrationsPresets)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get migration service status (/en/api/getApiMigrationsStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List email signatures (/en/api/getApiSignaturesCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get email signature (/en/api/getApiSignaturesCodeIdentity)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# List team members (/en/api/getApiTeamMembers)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get team member (/en/api/getApiTeamMembersTeamMemberCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Overview (/en/api)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
Qboxmail provides two API families: the Management API for domains, mailboxes, aliases, migrations, Vault, and Delivery resources, and the Send API for sending email through Qboxmail Delivery. Start with the [API concepts](/en/api/concepts) for authentication, errors, pagination, and common patterns.
## Management API endpoints [#management-api-endpoints]
# Create addressbook (/en/api/postApiAddressbooksCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create contact (/en/api/postApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookIdContacts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Activate Vault for domain (/en/api/postApiArchiveDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Activate Vault for email accounts (/en/api/postApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create Delivery account (/en/api/postApiDeliveryAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create Delivery API token (/en/api/postApiDeliveryAccountsIdApiTokens)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create Delivery domain (/en/api/postApiDeliveryDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify Delivery domain (/en/api/postApiDeliveryDomainsDomainCodeVerification)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create suppression list entry (/en/api/postApiDeliverySuppressionLists)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Delete suppression list entry (/en/api/postApiDeliverySuppressionListsDelete)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get suppression list entry (/en/api/postApiDeliverySuppressionListsDetails)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Export suppression list (/en/api/postApiDeliverySuppressionListsExport)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Import suppression list (/en/api/postApiDeliverySuppressionListsImport)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Get TraceMail dashboard (/en/api/postApiDeliveryTracemailDashboard)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create domain (/en/api/postApiDomains)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create email alias (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create domain alias (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeAliases)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership email code (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Generate HTML ownership file (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeHtmlOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Generate DKIM record (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeDkim)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create email account (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccounts)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership email code (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Generate HTML ownership file (/en/api/postApiDomainsDomainCodeHtmlOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create import (/en/api/postApiImports)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create manager (/en/api/postApiManagers)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Preview manager delivery assignment (/en/api/postApiManagersManagerCodeAssignDeliveryPreview)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create migration (/en/api/postApiMigrations)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create email signature (/en/api/postApiSignaturesCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Create team member (/en/api/postApiTeamMembers)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update addressbook (/en/api/putApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update contact (/en/api/putApiAddressbooksCodeAddressbookIdContactsUid)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Vault domain settings (/en/api/putApiArchiveDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Vault email account settings (/en/api/putApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Vault email account status (/en/api/putApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Vault domain status (/en/api/putApiArchiveDomainsDomainCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Delivery account (/en/api/putApiDeliveryAccountsId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Delivery API token (/en/api/putApiDeliveryAccountsIdApiTokensTokenId)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Reset Delivery account password (/en/api/putApiDeliveryAccountsIdPassword)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Delivery account status (/en/api/putApiDeliveryAccountsIdStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update Delivery domain status (/en/api/putApiDeliveryDomainsDomainCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update suppression list entry (/en/api/putApiDeliverySuppressionListsEdit)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update domain (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update email alias (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasEmailAccountsAliasEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with DNS (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeDnsOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with DNS synchronously (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeDnsOwnershipCheckSync)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Send ownership verification email (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with HTML file (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeHtmlOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Reset email ownership verification (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeResetEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Skip ownership check (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeAliasesAliasDomainCodeSkipOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify DKIM record (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDkim)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Disable DKIM without deleting setup (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDkimDisable)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Enable DKIM (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDkimEnable)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Recheck DKIM record (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDkimRecheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Reset DKIM setup (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDkimReset)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Check domain DNS records (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDns)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with DNS (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDnsOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with DNS synchronously (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeDnsOwnershipCheckSync)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update email account (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailAccountCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update email account status (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailAccountsEmailAccountCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Send ownership verification email (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Verify ownership with HTML file (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeHtmlOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Reset email ownership verification (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeResetEmailOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update trusted networks (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeSettingsTrustedNetworks)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Skip ownership check (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeSkipOwnershipCheck)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update domain status (/en/api/putApiDomainsDomainCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update manager (/en/api/putApiManagersManagerCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Assign delivery resources to manager (/en/api/putApiManagersManagerCodeAssignDelivery)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update manager status (/en/api/putApiManagersManagerCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Execute migration now (/en/api/putApiMigrationsMigrationCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update email signature (/en/api/putApiSignaturesCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update team member (/en/api/putApiTeamMembersTeamMemberCode)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update team member status (/en/api/putApiTeamMembersTeamMemberCodeStatus)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Update notification settings (/en/api/putApiUsersMeNotifications)
{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}
# Billing (/en/guides/billing/billing)
By accessing your **Customer Area** ([https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/)) you can check the status of your invoices and payments at any time.
Qboxmail mainly offers *pay-per-use* services (you pay for what you use). Payment is made in advance and includes two billing types:
* Monthly
* Annual
### Monthly Billing [#monthly-billing]
Monthly billing is the ideal solution for Resellers and for anyone who wants to be able to activate or deactivate email accounts without limits.
With monthly billing, the minimum order is 5 total email mailboxes.
Once you become our customer, monthly billing lets you manage your domains and email accounts from the Control Panel with complete freedom and autonomy.
Every month, our system automatically counts the email accounts you have added in the Panel (both active and inactive) and generates a Proforma document with the service renewal proposal for another month.
For billing purposes, a domain without email accounts is counted as an 8 GB
email account.
If you make the payment, or if you do not send a cancellation notice, the service is renewed month by month and the contractual terms are automatically accepted again.
If you have enabled PayPal with automatic debit and do not send a service
cancellation request, the payment will be made automatically.
#### First order [#first-order]
If you are placing your initial order and have selected monthly billing, the minimum order is 5 total email mailboxes, which will be included in the Proforma document whether you have created the mailboxes or not.
The mailbox price for the first order will be the standard price shown on our
website.
If you have qualified as a **reseller**, the first order will still be calculated based on the price shown on the website. Once you have completed the first order procedure and made the first payment, you will be able to access the Control Panel and find your current price tier on the pricing page. As soon as you meet the [requirements to request access to reseller discounts](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/guides/billing/resellers#requirements-to-become-a-reseller) based on the number of email mailboxes, you can click *Request* on the pricing page in the panel.
### Annual Billing [#annual-billing]
Annual billing is the ideal solution for those who want to make a single payment and receive a single invoice. With annual billing, you can only activate the domains and email accounts specified during the order. You can still add both domains and email accounts at any time by placing another order from the Control Panel. Each addition must include at least 1 email account.
With annual billing, the minimum order is 1 email mailbox per domain.
The month before the annual expiration date, a Proforma document will be generated with the service renewal proposal for another year. If you make the payment, or if you do not send a cancellation notice, the service is renewed year by year and the contractual terms are automatically accepted again.
If you have enabled PayPal with automatic debit and do not send a service
cancellation request, the payment will be made automatically on the expiration
date.
### Electronic invoice [#electronic-invoice]
Before the service renewal or at the time of the [first order](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/guides/billing/service-purchase), the system sends a **Proforma document** with the service renewal proposal to the administrative email address. Once the payment has been made, as soon as it is registered in the system (in the case of a bank transfer, this may take a few days), the courtesy invoice with the payment confirmation will be generated and sent to the specified address.
At the same time, the system generates the **XML file** that is sent to the **Sistema di Interscambio dell'Agenzia delle Entrate**. If the **Codice Destinatario** has been entered correctly, Italian customers will find the electronic invoice in their tax portal within a few days.
### Customer Area [#customer-area]
By accessing your **Customer Area** at [https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) you can, at any time:
* View and download the history of courtesy invoices.
* Check for paid and unpaid invoices.
* Pay invoices.
* Create a *Billing Agreement* to use PayPal with automatic debit.
* Change billing details.
* Contact support via Ticket.
* Read replies sent by support via Ticket.
* Send the service cancellation notice.
# Buying the service (/en/guides/billing/buy-service)
Below you will find the **procedure for purchasing Qboxmail's email service**.
To try or purchase the service, you need to register for the 30-day Free Trial.
After registering for the Free Trial, once the system has performed some security checks, you will have access to the email management Control Panel and you can immediately start creating email accounts for your domain.
## Registering for the 30-day Free Trial [#registering-for-the-30-day-free-trial]
To start the trial, go to our website [https://www.qboxmail.it/](https://www.qboxmail.it/) and click *Start the Free Trial* or click the direct link [https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/](https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/)
Complete all fields in the free trial form:
* First name
* Last name
* Email address you will use to access the Control Panel
* Country where you are located
* Preferred language, choosing between Italian or English
Accept the [Terms of Service](https://www.qboxmail.it/termini-di-servizio/) and authorize the processing of your personal data in accordance with the Privacy Policy to receive information and promotional material from Qboxmail S.r.l. You can view the terms of service at any time on the dedicated page of our website.
By clicking Start Trial, our system will send you an email at the address you provided, with a link to confirm your registration and set the password to access the Panel.
### Free Trial features and conditions [#free-trial-features-and-conditions]
#### Features [#features]
During the trial period, the following features will be available:
* You can add up to 5 domains
* You can create up to 25 email accounts of 8 GB each
* Each account has a 24-hour sending limit of 25 messages
* To prevent abuse, some features may not be active during this period
#### Conditions [#conditions]
The system will show you the number of days remaining until the end of the free trial.
At any time, you can decide to end the free trial or purchase the service.
To end the trial, you can simply stop accessing the panel and, 15 days after the end of the Trial, the domains and email accounts you added will be permanently removed from our systems.
Alternatively, you can open a support [Ticket](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) by clicking Support inside the Control Panel and request the deletion of your profile.
### Accessing the Email Control Panel [#accessing-the-email-control-panel]
Once this operation is complete, you can access the [Control Panel](https://panel.qboxmail.com/) by going to [https://panel.qboxmail.com/](https://panel.qboxmail.com/) and entering the credentials you have just set:
* **Username**: registration email address
* **Password**: only you know it!
At this point you can try the service **free of charge for 30 days** and, whenever you want, you can place your order at any time during the trial or decide to stop using our service, with no obligation.
### Videos and documentation to get started: [#videos-and-documentation-to-get-started]
**Add a domain** – [Docs](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/domini#aggiungere-un-dominio) – [Video Guide](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jZvwOtf_KxU)
**Create an email account** – [Docs](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/email-account#aggiungere-un-email-account) – [Video Guide](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=79Ww9_qNkLg)
### Placing an order [#placing-an-order]
If you want to purchase the service, access the Control Panel during the Trial and click *Orders* in the sidebar.
Complete all required fields and select all your preferences.
For more details on [how to purchase the
service](https://www.qboxmail.it/blog/acquistare-servizio-email-qboxmail/),
visit the Qboxmail blog.
#### Choosing the user type [#choosing-the-user-type]
* **Private individual**: if you are a user with a Tax Code, but without a VAT number. (Only for residents in Italy)
* **Company**: freelancer or company with a VAT number that purchases the service for its own use.
* **Reseller**: freelancer or company, with a VAT number, that purchases the service to resell it to third parties.
#### Billing type [#billing-type]
**If you are a Private individual or a Company** you can choose between:
* **Monthly Billing**: suitable for those who need to frequently change the number of accounts. With monthly billing, the service is pay-per-use and provides full flexibility and autonomy of use. With monthly billing, the minimum purchase order is 5 total email accounts.
* **Annual Billing**: suitable for those who do not need to frequently change the number of email accounts and prefer to renew the service annually in a single payment, benefiting from a small discount on the fee compared to the monthly cost. With annual billing, it is possible to purchase even just 1 email account.
**If you are a Reseller** you can select only:
* **Monthly Billing**: as an IT services reseller, you will constantly need to activate or delete email accounts, change account sizes, switch plans, purchase additional options for your customers, and modify account settings. With monthly billing, you can perform any type of action inside the panel, in complete autonomy and without having to place any other order: our system will do everything automatically and will send you the proforma document for service renewal at the end of the month. The minimum order is 5 total email accounts.
Reseller status is subject to approval and to meeting specific requirements.
For this reason, the initial order will be placed at list price. Once you meet the requirements to be classified as a reseller, you can contact us and request the application of the dedicated Reseller conditions.
**The requirements to become a reseller** are:
* Have at least 10 total email accounts in the Qboxmail control panel
* Add at least one domain different from your own
* Resell the email service to third parties
* Complete [training with Qboxmail](https://calendly.com/qboxmail/fcommerciale) to learn about all our tools
Qboxmail may verify these requirements at any time and decide whether to apply or stop applying the conditions provided for resellers.
### Payment [#payment]
Select the payment method most convenient for you:
* **Bank transfer**: allows you to make the payment by bank transfer following the instructions you will receive by email at the end of the procedure.
* **PayPal or Credit Card**: allows you to make the payment using your PayPal account or your credit card.
* **PayPal with automatic debit**: allows you to set up automatic invoice payment through your PayPal account, so you no longer have to worry about deadlines.
Once the order procedure is complete, you will receive the Proforma document with the amount to pay in order to use the service.
Once payment has been made, you will receive the courtesy invoice and we will generate the electronic invoice, which will be sent to the Sistema di Interscambio. The order will be processed and, within a timeframe ranging from a few minutes to a few hours, we will unlock the service and you will be fully operational, without the free trial limits.
### Customer and billing area [#customer-and-billing-area]
Once you have completed the order procedure and made the payment, you will be operational. You can access the Customer and billing area by going to [https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and view your billing details and invoice history. From here, you can also open support [Tickets](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) by clicking *Open Ticket*.
# Service cancellation (/en/guides/billing/cancel-service)
If you want to stop using the Qboxmail service, please submit a **service cancellation request** by following the procedure provided.
Ending the service will delete all domains and email accounts in the Control
Panel on the expiration date specified during the cancellation process.
### Cancellation request [#cancellation-request]
Log in to the [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and click *Services*. Click the *service or services you want to cancel* > *Request cancellation* and follow the procedure.
### Monthly service cancellation [#monthly-service-cancellation]
If you have monthly billing, you can choose whether to terminate the service immediately or at the end of the month. Once the cancellation has been submitted, Qboxmail will not proceed with any further service renewals, but will not issue any refund for a monthly service that has already been purchased.
*Example: The service was renewed for the month of June and the customer cancels immediately on June 20. In this case, Qboxmail will not refund the 10 days of unused service.*
### Annual service cancellation [#annual-service-cancellation]
If you have annual billing, you can choose whether to terminate the service immediately or at expiration. Once the cancellation has been submitted, Qboxmail will not proceed with any further service renewals, but will not issue any refund for an annual service that has already been purchased.
*Example: The service was purchased on January 1 for 1 year. The customer cancels immediately on September 30. In this case, Qboxmail will not refund the 3 months of unused service.*
# Billing (/en/guides/billing)
In this section you will find useful parameters and guides for configuring access to Qboxmail services.
# Payment methods (/en/guides/billing/payment-methods)
To pay invoices for Qboxmail services, you can choose the payment method that best suits your needs:
| Payment method | Selectable during order | Automatic charge |
| --------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ---------------- |
| SEPA direct debit | No | Yes |
| Bank transfer | No | No |
| Credit card with automatic charge | Yes | Yes |
| PayPal | Yes | No |
| PayPal with automatic charge | Yes | Yes |
### SEPA direct debit [#sepa-direct-debit]
By choosing SEPA direct debit, you can charge invoice amounts directly to your bank account. With this payment method, invoices for Qboxmail services will be paid automatically on their due date.
> \[!NOTE]
> This payment method can only be requested after the first order
To request activation of SEPA direct debit payments, you need to open a ticket in the Billing section by accessing your [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/).
Once this payment method has been assigned to you, you will need to enter the details of the bank account (IBAN) to which invoices will be charged. The bank account must be held by the same company to which the service invoice is issued.
To enter the IBAN, access your [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and go to *Administration -> My invoices*. Click the invoice to be paid; a new page will open with the invoice details. Click the green "Pay now" button. You will be asked to specify:
* **Account Holder Name**: specify the exact name of the bank account holder
* **IBAN**: enter the IBAN of the bank account to which invoices will be charged
* **Description**: enter any description you prefer
* **Billing address**: select your company address
Finally, click **Make payment**. The actual payment of the invoice takes about 5 business days to complete successfully.
You can also access the invoice to be paid through the link in the email message you will automatically receive as the service expiration date approaches.
If the invoice payment is not successful, you will be charged collection fees of €9 + VAT, in addition to the amount due for the service.
You can cancel the SEPA direct debit mandate at any time from your [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) in the Payment Methods section. If you need to change your bank account IBAN, contact us by opening a Ticket in the Billing section.
This payment method is reserved for customers in the single euro payments area.
### Bank transfer [#bank-transfer]
You can pay by bank transfer using the following bank details:
| Bank details | |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------- |
| IBAN | IT70E0306921531100000007817 |
| Account holder | Qboxmail Srl |
| Bank | Intesa San Paolo Spa |
| Branch | Via Degli Alberti, Prato, 59100, Italia |
| BIC | BCITITMMXXX |
Enter the proforma document number you are paying in the bank transfer reason.
> \[!NOTE]
> This payment method can only be requested after the first order
### Credit card with automatic charge [#credit-card-with-automatic-charge]
You can pay by credit card with automatic charge. With this payment method, invoices for Qboxmail services will be paid automatically on their due date.
To enter your credit card details, access your [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and go to *Administration -> My invoices*. Click the invoice to be paid; a new page will open with the invoice details. Click the green "Pay now" button. You will be asked to specify:
* **Credit Card Number**
* **Expiration date**
* **CVV/CVC2**
* **Billing address**: select your company address
* **Description**: enter any description you prefer
Finally, click **Make payment** and, if required, follow your bank's instructions to authorize the payment.
You can also access the invoice to be paid through the link in the email message you will automatically receive as the service expiration date approaches.
**Update the Credit Card:** You can change your credit card details at any time from your [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) in the Payment Methods section.
### PayPal [#paypal]
You can choose PayPal as your payment method and renew by manually paying invoices at each due date.
Click the PayPal symbol at the top right and click *log in* with your PayPal credentials to pay through your PayPal account.
### PayPal with automatic charge [#paypal-with-automatic-charge]
By choosing PayPal with automatic charge, invoices will be paid by withdrawing the amount due from your PayPal account. With this payment method, invoices for Qboxmail services will be paid automatically on their due date.
To activate this method, you must have a PayPal account and authorize us to make the withdrawal on the due date by creating a *Billing Agreement* from your Customer Area. Access the [Customer Area](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and click *> Administration > Manage my PayPal > Create New Billing Agreement*, then follow the on-screen instructions.
### Request support [#request-support]
If you have questions about the billing system, payment, or if you want to change payment method, contact us by opening a Ticket in the Billing section and sending us your request.
# Resellers (/en/guides/billing/resellers)
If you want to become a reseller of Qboxmail's email service, please fill out the [Reseller Form](https://www.qboxmail.it/rivenditori/) and sign up for our [30-day Free Trial](https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/) from our website.
### Reseller Program [#reseller-program]
Once you have completed the form, we will provide you with the reseller program, where you will find all the details of the email service designed for resellers. Our Team will contact you by email or phone to get to know you and understand your needs, so we can show you the best solutions available with our offer.
All services listed in the Program are described in detail in the various sections of this documentation.
### Signing up for the 30-day Free Trial [#signing-up-for-the-30-day-free-trial]
To start the trial, go to our website [https://www.qboxmail.it/](https://www.qboxmail.it/) and click *Start the Free Trial* or click the direct link [https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/](https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/)
Complete all fields in the free trial form:
* First name
* Last name
* Email address you will use to access the Control Panel
* Country where you are located
* Preferred language, choosing between Italian or English
Accept the [Terms of Service](https://www.qboxmail.it/termini-di-servizio/) and authorize the processing of your personal data in accordance with the Privacy Policy to receive information and promotional material from Qboxmail S.r.l. You can view the terms of service at any time on the dedicated page of our website.
By clicking Start the Trial, our system will send an email to the email address you provided, with a link to confirm your registration and set the password to access the Panel.
#### Features [#features]
During the trial period, the following features will be available:
* You can add up to 5 domains
* You can create up to 25 email accounts of 8 GB
* Each account has a sending limit of 25 messages in 24 hours
* To prevent abuse, some features may not be active during this period
#### Conditions [#conditions]
The system will show you the number of days remaining until the end of the free trial.
You can decide to end the free trial or purchase the service at any time.
To end the trial, you can simply stop accessing the panel and, 15 days after the end of the trial, the domains and email accounts you added will be permanently removed from our systems.
Alternatively, you can open a support [Ticket](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) by clicking Support inside the Control Panel and request the deletion of your profile.
### Accessing the Email Control Panel [#accessing-the-email-control-panel]
Once you have completed this operation, you can access the [Control Panel](https://panel.qboxmail.com/) by going to [https://panel.qboxmail.com/](https://panel.qboxmail.com/) and entering the credentials you just set:
* **Username**: registration email address
* **Password**: only you know it!
At this point, you can try the service **free of charge for 30 days** and, whenever you want, you can place your order at any time during the trial or decide to stop using our service, with no commitment.
#### Videos and documentation to get started: [#videos-and-documentation-to-get-started]
**Add a domain** – [Docs](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/domini#aggiungere-un-dominio) – [Video Guide](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jZvwOtf_KxU)
**Create an email account** – [Docs](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/email-account#aggiungere-un-email-account) – [Video Guide](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=79Ww9_qNkLg)
### Purchasing the service as a Reseller [#purchasing-the-service-as-a-reseller]
If you want to purchase the service, access the Control Panel during the trial and click *Orders* in the sidebar.
Complete all required fields and select all your preferences.
#### Choosing the user type [#choosing-the-user-type]
In this section, you must identify yourself as a service Reseller and check the Reseller option. **Reseller**: freelancer or company, with a VAT number, that purchases the service to resell it to third parties.
#### Billing Type [#billing-type]
Monthly billing is available for Resellers, to offer maximum flexibility in managing email accounts. As an IT services reseller, you will constantly need to activate or delete email accounts, change account sizes, switch plans, purchase additional options for your customers, and modify account settings. With monthly billing, you can perform any type of action inside the panel, independently and without having to place any other order: our system will handle everything automatically and send you the pro forma document for service renewal at the end of the month.
The minimum order to purchase the service with monthly billing is 5 email
accounts. The first order is placed at full price, without the discount
dedicated to resellers. This is because reseller status requires meeting
certain requirements and must be approved by Qboxmail.
#### Payment [#payment]
Select the payment method that is most convenient for you:
* **Bank transfer**: allows you to make the payment by bank transfer following the instructions you will receive by email at the end of the procedure.
* **PayPal or Credit Card**: allows you to make the payment using your PayPal account or your credit card.
* **PayPal with automatic debit**: allows you to set up automatic invoice payments through your PayPal account, so you no longer have to worry about deadlines.
Once the order procedure is complete, you will receive the Proforma document with the amount to pay in order to use the service.
Once payment has been made, you will receive the courtesy invoice and we will generate the electronic invoice, which will be sent to the Sistema di Interscambio. The order will be processed and, within a few minutes or a few hours, we will unlock the service and you will be fully operational, without the limits of the free trial.
### Requirements to become a reseller [#requirements-to-become-a-reseller]
* Have at least 10 total email accounts in the Qboxmail Control Panel (minimum billable amount for the Reseller Plan)
* Add at least one domain other than your own
* Resell the email service to third parties
* Complete [training with Qboxmail](https://calendly.com/qboxmail/fcommerciale) to learn about all our tools
Qboxmail may verify these requirements at any time and decide whether or not to continue applying the conditions available to resellers.
### Customer and billing area [#customer-and-billing-area]
Once you have completed the order procedure and made the payment, you will be operational. You can access the Customer and billing area by going to [https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) and view your billing details and invoice history. From here you can also open support [Tickets](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) by clicking *Open Ticket*.
# Access parameters (/en/guides/configurations/access-parameters)
Access to POP, IMAP, and SMTP services is available to all Qboxmail users and always requires authentication with a username and password. For your security, Qboxmail requires access to services using the TLS protocol.
Qboxmail provides the services but does not handle the configuration and
management of user-side devices and programs. It is therefore the customer's
responsibility to ensure the correct configuration and troubleshooting of
service settings for their users.
### Access parameters for users [#access-parameters-for-users]
Below you can find the details of the access parameters you need to set in your email client:
| POP access | |
| -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| Username | e.g. [name@company.com](mailto:name@company.com) |
| Password | your password |
| Incoming mail hostname or server | pop.qboxmail.com |
| Access port | 995 |
| Connection security | TLS |
| IMAP access | |
| -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| Username | e.g. [name@company.com](mailto:name@company.com) |
| Password | your password |
| Incoming mail hostname or server | imap.qboxmail.com |
| Access port | 993 |
| Connection security | TLS |
| SMTP access | |
| -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Username | e.g. [name@company.com](mailto:name@company.com) |
| Password | your password |
| Outgoing mail hostname or server | smtp.qboxmail.com |
| Access port | 465 (if you have issues, try port 25 or 587 with the STARTTLS option) |
| Connection security | SSL |
If you receive an “Invalid or insecure SSL certificate” message, make sure you are using the server names listed above.
### White Label access parameters [#white-label-access-parameters]
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers to set in users' email clients. Using White Label parameters removes any direct reference to Qboxmail. You can download the PDF file with the [White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) (login required) for service access from the customer area after signing in.
### Private Label access parameters [#private-label-access-parameters]
If you have purchased the Private Label service, you can customize the access parameters for POP, IMAP, and SMTP services by entering your domain name.\
Private Label configuration is a project-based service and is not included in the service fee.
### Allowed simultaneous sessions [#allowed-simultaneous-sessions]
In order to preserve and maintain a high level of service for all users, limits apply to the number of simultaneous connections via IMAP (50 allowed) and POP3 (10 allowed) that a single account can open from a specific IP address. This limit only applies when there is a high number of connections from the same username, while during normal use the user never notices the existence of this policy. If you reach this limit, you will receive an error in your email client and in [Email log analysis](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/tracemail) you will be able to find evidence of this issue.
# Android (/en/guides/configurations/android)
In this guide, we will configure email and the Contacts and Calendar apps available on Android to access the address book and calendar services offered by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.com).
This way, you can keep the address books and calendars available in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.com/features/webmail/) synchronized with Android as well. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible from Android and vice versa.
If you need to configure your email account using Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync [go to the dedicated
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/protocols/exchange-activesync).
### What you need [#what-you-need]
* An active email account on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise plan](https://www.qboxmail.com/pricing/compare-plans/) to access shared Address Book and Calendar services
* Samsung Email (downloadable from the [Play Store](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.samsung.android.email.provider\&noprocess))
* Open Sync app (downloadable from the [Play Store](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.deependhulla.opensync\&noprocess))
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
We recommend using the latest version of Android available for your device to avoid synchronization issues when using the latest available technologies.
### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure a Qboxmail email account on an Android device, you need to use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* Open the client after installation (if it is already installed and configured, click the gear icon in the side menu and choose **Add account**)
* Choose **Other**
* Enter the **username** and **password** of the mailbox to configure and confirm with the **Sign in** button
* Select **IMAP** as the account type
In the screen that opens, enter the following information:
* Email address: email address to configure
* Username: full email address
* Password: the account password
* IMAP server: **imap.qboxmail.com**
* Security type: **SSL**
* Port: **993**
* SMTP server: **smtp.qboxmail.com**
* Security type: **SSL**
* Port: **465**
* Require authentication to send email: **YES**
* Confirm the username and password to use for sending
* Click **Sign in**
Once done, the configuration window will close and the client will start synchronizing email. Now check that the email synchronization period is set correctly:
* Open the side menu
* Click the gear icon
* Click the configured account in the list
* Check the value of **Email sync period** and set it to **1 month**
### Address Book and Calendar configuration with Open Sync [#address-book-and-calendar-configuration-with-open-sync]
After installing the app on the Android device, follow these steps:
* Disable the device battery optimization by clicking **Disable for opensync** in the popup that appears on screen
* **Install OpenTask** to enable task support
* Click the orange plus button to add the DAV account
* Select **Sign in with URL and username**
Enter the Qboxmail DAV server details here:
* Base URL: [**https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav**](https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav)
* Username: **email address of the account to configure**
* Password: **password of the account to configure**
* Click **Login**
* In the Contact group method field, select **Groups are separate VCards**
* Click **CREATE ACCOUNT**
After creating the account, a notification will appear asking you to grant the plugin access permissions to Calendar and Contacts. After granting access permissions, click the account you just added.
In the screen that opens, all address books and calendars of the Qboxmail account will be displayed. Select the resources to synchronize and then force the first synchronization by clicking the button with the two arrows in the top bar.
When synchronization is complete, the contacts and events from the added Qboxmail resources will be visible by opening the calendar or address book app on the Android device.
# Autodiscover Settings (/en/guides/configurations/autodiscover-settings)
### What Autodiscover is and what it is used for [#what-autodiscover-is-and-what-it-is-used-for]
Autodiscover is a protocol that allows email clients (such as Thunderbird, Apple Mail, or Microsoft Outlook) to automatically configure the server connection settings for your email address, instead of configuring all parameters manually. This will certainly save you time, especially if you need to configure many accounts.
To use the autodiscover system, you must make sure that your client supports this feature, as not all email clients currently support it fully. You must also update your domain's DNS configuration to add some parameters that will allow you to contact the autodiscover service correctly.
Setting up autodiscover for your domain certainly makes the initial email account setup easier for users and eliminates any errors when entering parameters. It is also a very simple configuration to perform and has no additional cost or performance impact.
Qboxmail's Autodiscover implementation provides IMAP and SMTP settings for desktop email clients and Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync settings for smartphones.
The *Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync* service is available only for domains
with an Enterprise plan. The advantage of using EAS is the ease of
configuration on mobile devices and real-time Push notifications for new
emails and calendar events.
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
Not all email clients are currently compatible with all protocols. Below is the list of clients for which autodiscover works correctly and the type of protocol used for automatic configuration:
| Client | Version | Protocol |
| ------------------------------------------ | ------------- | ------------------------------ |
| Microsoft Outlook | 2013 or later | IMAP and SMTP |
| Microsoft Mail, Contacts, and Calendar app | Windows 10 | Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync |
| Mozilla Thunderbird | 60 or later | IMAP and SMTP |
| Android | latest | Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync |
| Apple iOS | 12 or later | Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync |
With manual configuration, it remains possible to set up the email client with
all protocols it supports.
### Setting up Autodiscover via VirtualHost [#setting-up-autodiscover-via-virtualhost]
To ensure *full compatibility* with the various email clients, you need to create a VirtualHost on your own server associated with your domain, in the form **autodiscover.mycompany.com**, with a valid **SSL** certificate installed. Inside the created VirtualHost, it is sufficient to add a 302 redirect to the Qboxmail autodiscover server.
Replace *mycompany.com* with your domain name.
Below is an example virtualhost with redirect rules:
```
ServerName autodiscover.mycompany.com
ServerAlias autoconfig.mycompany.com
RewriteEngine on
RewriteRule ^.*config-v1\.1\.xml$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/thunderbird.php [NC,R=302,L]
RewriteRule ^.*autodiscover\.xml$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/outlook.php [NC,R=302,L]
RewriteRule ^.*autodiscover\.json$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/outlook.json.php [NC,R=302,L]
SSLEngine on
SSLCertificateFile /path/to/ssl.cert
SSLCertificateKeyFile /path/to/ssl.key
```
Alternatively, if you cannot modify the virtualhost directly, it is sufficient to create an *.htaccess* file to place in the document root of your autodiscover.mycompany.com domain:
```
RewriteEngine On
RewriteRule ^.*config-v1\.1\.xml$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/thunderbird.php [NC,R=302,L]
RewriteRule ^.*autodiscover\.xml$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/outlook.php [NC,R=302,L]
RewriteRule ^.*autodiscover\.json$ https://autodiscover.qboxmail.com/outlook.json.php [NC,R=302,L]
```
Both configurations listed above require the **mod\_rewrite** module to be
enabled on Apache.
### Setting up Autodiscover via DNS records [#setting-up-autodiscover-via-dns-records]
If you cannot create a VirtualHost in HTTPS, you can configure autodiscover through a configuration on the domain's DNS. However, it is important to remember that this configuration may not be sufficient to make autodiscover compatible with your email client. Access the DNS management panel of the provider where you registered the domain and add the following CNAME records as shown:
| Record | Record Type | Value |
| -------------------------- | ----------- | -------------------------- |
| autoconfig.mycompany.com | CNAME | autodiscover.qboxmail.com. |
| autodiscover.mycompany.com | CNAME | autodiscover.qboxmail.com. |
The setting above authorizes your email client to contact Qboxmail's autodiscover service to obtain the mail server configuration data for your domain.
The autoconfig record is used by Thunderbird, while autodiscover is used by
EAS/Outlook.
After adding the records listed above, it may take up to 24 hours before the DNS change is fully operational.
### Verifying the correct setup of records for autodiscover [#verifying-the-correct-setup-of-records-for-autodiscover]
To verify the correct setup of the records for autodiscover on your domain, you can run the following nslookup commands from the terminal:
```
nslookup -q=cname autoconfig.mycompany.com
nslookup -q=cname autodiscover.mycompany.com
```
which should return respectively:
```
autoconfig.mycompany.com canonical name = autodiscover.qboxmail.com.
autoconfig.mycompany.com canonical name = autodiscover.qboxmail.com.
```
# DAV connection parameters (/en/guides/configurations/dav-connection-parameters)
The [SOGo](https://sogo.nu) implementation made available by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it) can also be used as a **CalDAV and CardDAV server** by any client or plugin that supports these protocols.
Access to CalDAV and CardDAV services is available only for domains with a
Professional or Enterprise plan
Qboxmail provides the services but does not handle the configuration and
management of user-side devices and programs. It is therefore the customer's
responsibility to ensure the correct configuration and troubleshooting of
service configurations for their users.
### CalDAV Calendar [#caldav-calendar]
The access link to your personal calendar via CalDAV is the following:
* [**https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/Calendar/personal/**](https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/Calendar/personal/)
### CardDAV Address Book [#carddav-address-book]
The access link to your personal address book via CardDAV is the following:
* [**https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/Contacts/personal/**](https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/Contacts/personal/)
In both examples, replace [name@domain.com](mailto:name@domain.com) with your email address. You will then be asked for your username and access password; the username is always your email address.
### Additional Address Books and Calendars [#additional-address-books-and-calendars]
If your client supports “Auto Detection URLs”, you can use this URL:
* [**https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/**](https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/name@domain.com/)
To find the URL of any additional address books and calendars, you can access Webmail, go to the Address Book or Calendar section, right-click the calendar you are interested in, and select Share. A new window will open; in the “Show URL” tab you will find the URLs for the following protocols:
* CardDAV
* CalDAV
* WebDAV ICS
* WebDAV XML
To access these URLs, you must always authenticate first. At the moment, with Qboxmail, it is not possible to publicly share a calendar or address book on the web.
# DKIM signature settings (/en/guides/configurations/dkim-signature-settings)
### What is a DKIM signature [#what-is-a-dkim-signature]
A DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail) signature is an email message authentication method that identifies the actual identity of the domain sending the message and helps prevent spoofing on outgoing messages.
### What a DKIM signature is used for [#what-a-dkim-signature-is-used-for]
A DKIM signature lets you identify whether a message was actually sent by your provider's SMTP servers. Having a DKIM signature on all sent emails is a good practice and can be very useful during analysis following a cybersecurity incident, as it makes it possible to determine whether the message was actually sent by you and whether it was modified after you sent it.
### Set up a DKIM signature [#set-up-a-dkim-signature]
All email messages sent from Qboxmail SMTP servers are digitally signed by default with a shared DKIM signature, to improve their reputation and provide greater security. No settings or changes to the domain DNS are therefore required: the DKIM signature is already active.
If needed, Qboxmail lets you set up a custom DKIM signature for each domain. The custom DKIM signature can be enabled from the Control Panel by following the guide [Set up a custom DKIM signature for a domain.](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/altro/dkim)
Before enabling a custom DKIM signature for your domain, make sure the SPF
record is configured correctly.
# DMARC policy settings (/en/guides/configurations/dmarc-policy-settings)
## What a DMARC record is and what it is used for [#what-a-dmarc-record-is-and-what-it-is-used-for]
DMARC is an email authentication protocol that allows the owner of a domain to specify how recipients should handle messages that are not authentic.
DMARC therefore allows a sender to require recipient servers to apply a specific behavior to messages that use one of their domains as the sender (`From:`) when the SPF and DKIM settings are not valid.
The DMARC email authentication system helps protect against fraud, such as spoofing or phishing, with forged senders. DMARC also makes it possible to receive daily XML reports from recipient servers about email traffic, so you can verify that the servers sending email on your behalf are legitimate.
### Set up a DMARC record [#set-up-a-dmarc-record]
Before activating a DMARC policy for your domain, make sure the SPF record is
configured correctly.
Setting up a DMARC record requires choosing how suspicious emails should be handled, meaning messages that do not comply with the domain's SPF and DKIM settings.
The policy (`p`) options are:
* **none**: no action is performed on the message.
* **quarantine**: messages are marked as spam and moved to the Spam folder.
* **reject**: the recipient server is asked to reject the message.
We recommend enabling DMARC policies gradually, starting from `none` and only
then moving to `quarantine` and finally `reject`.
An example DMARC record can be:
```txt
v=DMARC1; p=quarantine; rua=mailto:rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com; ruf=mailto:ruf@dmarc.qboxmail.com
```
This tells recipient servers to mark suspicious messages as spam and send the daily report to [rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com](mailto:rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com).
To apply the record shown above, create a TXT record in the domain DNS:
| Record name | Record type | Value |
| --------------------- | ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| \_dmarc.mycompany.com | TXT | `v=DMARC1; p=quarantine; rua=mailto:rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com; ruf=mailto:ruf@dmarc.qboxmail.com` |
Qboxmail interprets and applies the DMARC policies set by senders and supports sending daily XML reports.
You can also use web tools to create your DMARC policies: [https://www.kitterman.com/dmarc/assistant.html](https://www.kitterman.com/dmarc/assistant.html)
### DMARC reports [#dmarc-reports]
DMARC allows you to receive daily reports about the email traffic associated with your domain. Recipient servers generate the reports and send them to the addresses specified in the *rua* field of the DMARC record configured in DNS. We recommend using an address provided by the email provider or security service that manages report analysis.
Reports allow you to:
* identify domain abuse;
* detect unauthorized sends;
* identify incorrect configurations or legitimate services that send email without complying with DMARC policies.
Without reports, many abuse activities are not visible.
DMARC report management in Qboxmail
Through the Email Security service, we generate and send DMARC reports to all domains that configure a valid DMARC record with a reachable `rua` address.\
Every day, our systems analyze millions of email messages from thousands of domains.
Specifically, for each domain:
* received message data is collected and analyzed;
* message results are checked against the configured DMARC policy;
* XML reports compliant with the DMARC standard are generated;
* reports are sent to the addresses specified in the *rua* field.
For Email Providers that want to correctly identify DMARC reports sent by Qboxmail, messages are sent with the following characteristics:
* **sender**: [report@dmarc.qboxmail.com](mailto:report@dmarc.qboxmail.com)
* **sending server**: dmarcreport.qboxmail.com
Sending DMARC reports is a voluntary activity that helps ensure a safer email
service for all parties involved.
### DMARC limits with forwards and automatic replies [#dmarc-limits-with-forwards-and-automatic-replies]
Automatic replies and forwards may have issues if the domain has a DMARC
policy set to `p=quarantine` or `p=reject`.
This is because automatic replies and forwards require rewriting the sender: the recipient server would see a message from the original sender arriving through our forwarding servers, but the original sender's SPF record does not authorize our systems to send on their behalf.
For this reason, the sender must be rewritten using Sender Rewriting Scheme (SRS). However, this technique is not currently fully compatible with DMARC, so you need to remove the DMARC record or set the policy to `p=none`.
Here is an example DMARC record to use in these cases:
```txt
v=DMARC1; p=none; rua=mailto:rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com; ruf=mailto:ruf@dmarc.qboxmail.com
```
### Verify that the DMARC record is correctly configured in DNS [#verify-that-the-dmarc-record-is-correctly-configured-in-dns]
To verify that the DMARC record is correctly configured on your domain, run the `nslookup` command from a terminal:
```sh
nslookup -q=txt _dmarc.mycompany.com
```
The result should be:
```txt
_dmarc.mycompany.com text = "v=DMARC1; p=quarantine; rua=mailto:rua@dmarc.qboxmail.com; ruf=mailto:ruf@dmarc.qboxmail.com"
```
Learn more about [SPF, DKIM, and DMARC](https://www.qboxmail.it/spf-dkim-dmarc/)
on the Qboxmail website.
# Email clients (/en/guides/configurations/email-client)
Qboxmail's service is compatible with the main and most popular email clients, and more generally with all clients that support the following protocols:
* POP
* IMAP
* SMTP
For sharing address books and calendars, the supported protocols are:
* CardDAV
* CalDAV
* Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync
Professional and Enterprise plans allow you to share the address book and calendar across multiple devices while keeping all data synchronized with Qboxmail Webmail.
Qboxmail provides the services but does not handle the configuration and
management of user-side devices and programs. It is therefore the customer's
responsibility to ensure proper configuration and troubleshooting for service
settings for their users.
# Configurations (/en/guides/configurations)
In this section you can find the parameters and useful guides for configuring access to Qboxmail services.
Email clients
Operating systems
Protocols
# iPhone and iPad (/en/guides/configurations/iphone-ipad)
In this guide, we will configure the Mail, Contacts, and Calendar apps included in iOS to access the email, address book, and calendar services provided by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/).
This lets you keep the email, address book, and calendars available in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/webmail/) synchronized on iPhone/iPad as well. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible from iOS and vice versa.
If you need to configure your email account using **Microsoft® Exchange
ActiveSync**, [go to the dedicated
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/protocols/exchange-activesync).
### Requirements [#requirements]
* An active email mailbox on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise plan](https://www.qboxmail.it/prezzi/confronta-piani/) to access address book and calendar sharing services
* iPhone/iPad
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
We recommend using the latest version of iOS to avoid synchronization issues when using the latest available technologies. Since the software used is already included in the operating system, there are no special precautions to report, other than installing all available updates for your iPhone/iPad.
### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure a Qboxmail email account in Apple Mail, you need to use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* Open **Settings**
* Choose **Mail** from the list
* Click **Accounts**, then **Add Account**, and select **Other**
* Choose **Add Mail Account**
In the window that appears, enter the following information:
* Name: Name displayed in the sender field
* Email: email address to configure
* Password: The email account password
* Description: A name to assign to the email account
After filling in the fields, click **Next** and complete the remaining fields for the mail server:
* Choose whether to use **IMAP** or **POP**
* Incoming mail server - Host name: **imap.qboxmail.com** or **pop.qboxmail.com**
* Outgoing mail server - Host name: **smtp.qboxmail.com**
* Username and Password: enter the email address and related password for both the incoming and outgoing mail servers (even if they are marked as optional, enter them anyway).
Confirm the settings you entered by clicking **Next,** select **Mail** and **Notes** in the next window, and click **Save**
When you now open the Apple Mail client, it will start downloading messages for the configured account.
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers to configure in users’ email clients. By using the White Label parameters, any direct reference to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the [PDF with the White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) for service access from the customer area after logging in.
### Address book configuration [#address-book-configuration]
To synchronize and share the address books on the Qboxmail platform, follow these steps:
* Open **Settings**
* Select **Contacts**
* Click **Accounts**, then **Add Account**, and select **Other**
* Click **Add CardDAV Account**
In the window that appears, enter the data for the account to configure and the address of the server to connect to.
* Server: `dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/[account email address]`
* Username: **the account email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Description: the name to give to the resource
After filling in the fields, click **Next**.
After completing this procedure, the window will close and the account will appear in the list of user accounts in iOS. When you open the **Contacts** application, the side menu will show, under Groups, the section for the account added earlier, containing the contacts available on the Qboxmail platform.
### Calendar configuration [#calendar-configuration]
To synchronize and share the calendars on the Qboxmail platform, follow these steps:
* Open **Settings**
* Select **Calendar**
* Click **Accounts**, then **Add Account**, and select **Other**
* Click **Add CalDAV Account**
In the window that appears, enter the data for the account to configure and the address of the server to connect to.
* Server: `dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/[account email address]`
* Username: **the account email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Description: the name to give to the resource
After filling in the fields, click **Next,** select **Calendars** and **Reminders**, and confirm by clicking **Save.**
After completing this procedure, the window will close and the account will appear in the list of user accounts in iOS. When you open the **Calendar** application, you will be able to find the section for the account you just added, with the personal calendars previously created.
# Mac OS (/en/guides/configurations/mac-os)
In this guide, we will configure the Mail, Contacts, and Calendar apps included in Mac OS to access the email, address book, and calendar services offered by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it).
This lets you keep the email, address book, and calendars available in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/webmail/) synchronized with Mac OS. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible from Mac OS and vice versa.
### Requirements [#requirements]
* An active email account on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise plan](https://www.qboxmail.it/prezzi/confronta-piani/) to access Address Book and Calendar sharing services
* Mac OS
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
We recommend using the latest version of macOS to avoid synchronization issues and to use the latest available technologies. Since the software used is already included in the operating system, there are no special precautions to report, other than installing all available updates for your Mac.
Access to Address Book and Calendar sharing services is available only for
domains with a Professional or Enterprise plan.
### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure your Qboxmail email account in Apple Mail, use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* Open **System Preferences**
* Click **Internet Accounts**
* In the list of accounts you can configure, select **Add Other Account…**
* Click **Mail Account**
In the window that opens, enter the following information:
* Name: name displayed in the sender field
* Email Address: email address to configure
* Password: the email account password
After completing the fields, click **Sign In** and fill in the remaining fields for the mail server:
* Account type: **IMAP** or **POP**
* Incoming mail server: **imap.qboxmail.com**
* Outgoing mail server: **smtp.qboxmail.com**
Click **Sign In** again to confirm the details entered and make sure that both Mail and Notes are selected in the next window. Finally, click **Done.**
When you open the Apple Mail client, it will start downloading messages for the configured account.
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers to configure in users' email clients. Using White Label parameters removes any direct reference to Qboxmail. You can download the [PDF with the White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) **(login required)** for accessing the services from the customer area after signing in.
### Address Book configuration [#address-book-configuration]
To synchronize and share the address books available on the Qboxmail platform, follow these steps:
* Open **System Preferences**
* Select **Internet Accounts**
* In the list that appears, select **Add Other Account…**
* Click **CardDAV Account**
* In the window that opens, in the **Account Type** field, select **Advanced**
On this screen, enter the details for the account to configure and the address of the server to connect to.
* User name: **the account email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Server address: **dav.qboxmail.com**
* Server path: `/SOGo/dav/[account email address]`
* Port: **443**, select the **Use SSL** option
After completing the fields, click **Sign In**.
After completing this procedure, the window will close and the account will appear in the list of user accounts in macOS.
When you open the **Contacts** app, the side menu will show the section for the account added previously, containing the contacts available on the Qboxmail platform.
### Calendar configuration [#calendar-configuration]
To synchronize and share the calendars available on the Qboxmail platform, follow these steps:
* Open **System Preferences**
* Select **Internet Accounts**
* In the list that appears, select **Add Other Account…**
* Click **CalDAV Account**
* In the window that opens, in the **Account Type** field, select **Advanced**
On this screen, enter the details for the account to configure and the address of the server to connect to.
* User name: **the account email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Server address: **dav.qboxmail.com**
* Server path: `/SOGo/dav/[account email address]`
* Port: **443**, select the **Use SSL** option
After completing the fields, click **Sign In**.
After completing this procedure, the window will close and the account will appear in the list of user accounts in macOS.
When you open the **Calendar** app, the side menu will show the section for the account added previously, containing the calendars available on the Qboxmail platform.
### Subscribed calendars configuration [#subscribed-calendars-configuration]
If you subscribed from Webmail to a calendar created by another user and, after performing the synchronization described in the previous section, you do not see it in Calendar on your Mac, follow these steps:
* In the Mac Calendar app, click Calendar > Preferences, then select Accounts.
* Select the Qboxmail account, then click Delegation.
* You will see the list of calendar accounts you have access to: to view the calendar of a delegated account, select "Show".
# Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync (/en/guides/configurations/microsoft-exchange)
### Introduction to Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync [#introduction-to-microsoft-exchange-activesync]
Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync is an Exchange synchronization protocol optimized for compatibility with high-latency and low-bandwidth networks. The protocol, based on HTTP and XML, allows mobile phones to access business information on a server running Microsoft® Exchange.
Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync allows mobile users to access email, calendar, contacts, and tasks, and to continue accessing this information even offline.
In this guide, we will configure several clients to access the email, address book, and calendar services offered by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/) using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol.
This way, you can keep the email, address book, and calendars in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/webmail/) synchronized with all your devices compatible with the service.
The Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync service is available only for domains with
an Enterprise plan.
The advantage of using Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync is the simplicity of
configuration on mobile devices and real-time push notifications for new
emails and calendar events.
### What you need [#what-you-need]
* An active email mailbox on Qboxmail
* A domain with an Enterprise plan to access Email, Address Book, and Calendar sharing services
* A client compatible with the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol
To simplify the configuration of the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync service on
devices, we recommend enabling Autodiscover on your domain by [following our
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/autodiscover-settings).
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
Although many clients are compatible with the ActiveSync protocol, not all of them can handle it correctly, especially if the mailbox is large, where large is a number that varies depending on the email client.
For ActiveSync to work properly, we recommend using it only on mobile devices.
* Microsoft Outlook from version 2013 onward
* Microsoft Mail Contacts Calendar app included in Windows 10
* Mozilla Thunderbird 68 (with the TBSync plugin downloadable [here](https://addons.thunderbird.net/it/thunderbird/addon/tbsync/) and the Provider for Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync plugin downloadable [here](https://addons.thunderbird.net/en-US/thunderbird/addon/eas-4-tbsync/))
* Android devices
* iPhone and iPad with iOS
New calendars and address books can be created directly from compatible devices; to share them with other users, however, you must first set sharing from Webmail. An event added from a compatible device will also be visible in Webmail and vice versa.
### Microsoft Outlook [#microsoft-outlook]
Microsoft Outlook has several limitations and operational issues with
ActiveSync, so its use is not recommended.
You can configure an account in Microsoft Outlook using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol to synchronize emails, contacts, and calendar entries with those on Qboxmail quickly and easily.
To add an account using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, follow these steps:
* Open the **Control Panel**
* Click or search for **Mail**
* Click the **Email Accounts…** button
* In the window that opens, in the Email tab, choose **New…**
* Select **Manual setup or additional server types** and confirm by clicking **Next**
* Choose **Exchange ActiveSync** and click **Next**
In the window that opens, fill in the fields to configure the connection to the server
* Name: Name of the account user
* Email address: **account email address**
* Mail server: **eas.qboxmail.com**
* User name: **account email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Remember password: **yes**
* Mail to keep offline: **All**
Confirm by clicking **Next** and close the connection test that opens automatically once the checks are complete. Finish the configuration by clicking **Finish**.
If Outlook is open, force an initial synchronization by closing and reopening it.
Microsoft Outlook support for Exchange ActiveSync does not include the Global
Address List (GAL) or Free-Busy, and contact synchronization is limited to the
Personal Address Book only.
### Microsoft Mail Contacts Calendar [#microsoft-mail-contacts-calendar]
You can configure an account in Microsoft Windows 10 using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol to synchronize emails, contacts, and calendar entries with those on Qboxmail quickly and easily.
To add an account using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, follow these steps:
* Open **Microsoft Mail**
* Click **Accounts** in the sidebar
* Click **Add account**
* In the list shown, choose **Exchange**
* Enter the **email address** to configure and click **Next**
* Enter the **password** and click **Sign in**
* Enter the **user name** and click **Sign in**
* If an error popup appears, select **Advanced**
In the window that appears, fill in the fields required for the connection
* User name: **the email address to add**
* Domain: empty
* Server: **eas.qboxmail.com**
* Select the option **Server requires encrypted (SSL) connection**
Confirm the data by clicking **Sign in**
After adding the account, the first synchronization will start and the configured account will also be available in the Contacts and Calendar apps.
### Mozilla Thunderbird [#mozilla-thunderbird]
You can configure an account in Mozilla Thunderbird using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol to synchronize contacts and calendar entries with those on Qboxmail quickly and easily.
To make Thunderbird compatible with the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, you need to install the TbSync plugin and the Provider for Exchange ActiveSync. This will make **only** address books and calendars available; for mail, you must still use the **POP/IMAP** protocols. Once installed, follow these steps to configure the account:
* Click **TbSync: Idle** in the Thunderbird window at the bottom right
* Click the **Account actions** button, select **Add new account**, and click **Exchange ActiveSync**
In the window that opens, select **Custom configuration** and fill in the fields to connect to the server.
* Account name: a descriptive name for the connection
* User name: **email address of the account to configure**
* Password: **the account password**
* Server address: **eas.qboxmail.com**
Confirm the entered data by clicking **Add account**. Once the account configuration window is closed, select the checkbox for the **Enable and synchronize this account** option.
Once the account is synchronized, you will see a summary of the resources you can add to Thunderbird. Select the desired address books and calendars and synchronize them by clicking the **Synchronize now** button.
By doing so, the selected Address Books and Calendars will be visible in the corresponding sections of the client.
### Android devices [#android-devices]
You can configure an account on an Android device using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol to synchronize emails, contacts, and calendar entries with those on Qboxmail quickly and easily.
To add an account using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, follow these steps:
* Open **Settings**
* Open **Accounts and backup**
* Open **Accounts**
* Select **Add account** from the list
* Select **Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync**
* Enter the email address to configure
* Enter the account password
* Click **Manual setup**
* Enter in Exchange server: **eas.qboxmail.com**
Confirm the entered settings by clicking **Sign in**
### iPhone and iPad [#iphone-and-ipad]
You can configure an account on iPhone or iPad using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol to synchronize emails, contacts, and calendar entries with those on Qboxmail quickly and easily.
To add an account using the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, follow these steps:
* Open **Settings**
* Click **Mail**
* Click **Accounts** and then **Add account**
* Select **Microsoft Exchange**
In the window that appears, enter the fields required for the connection
* Email: the email address of the account to configure
* Description: a description for the profile
Confirm the entered fields by clicking the **Next** button and clicking **Configure Manually**. Continue by entering the password of the account to configure and clicking **Next**.
In the next window, complete the configuration
* Server: **eas.qboxmail.com**
* Domain: empty
* User name: **email address**
Confirm the data by clicking **Next**. After selecting the resources to synchronize, confirm adding the account by clicking **Save**.
### Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync limitations [#microsoft-exchange-activesync-limitations]
For your desktop, if you have a large mailbox, over 5,000 messages or 1 GB of used space, IMAP is the recommended protocol. For your calendars or contacts, you can use any other synchronization protocol (such as CalDAV and CardDAV), but for your email you should use IMAP. IMAP has push-like support with the IMAP IDLE process, which sends new messages to your desktop client at preset intervals.
If you use a mobile device, Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync can also be used with large mailboxes. The reason it works well on mobile devices, but not on desktop clients such as Outlook for Windows, is that mobile clients only request a set time range for synchronization, for example one month of mail or less. Your smartphone will not download all the mail in your mailbox, unlike Microsoft Outlook for Windows.
# Microsoft Mail (/en/guides/configurations/microsoft-mail)
In this guide, we will configure the Mail, People, and Calendar apps included in Windows 10 to access the email, address book, and calendar services provided by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it).
This way, you can keep the email, address book, and calendars available in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/webmail/) synchronized with Windows 10. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible from Windows 10 and vice versa.
If you need to configure your email account using **Microsoft® Exchange
ActiveSync**, go to the [dedicated
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/protocols/exchange-activesync).
### Requirements [#requirements]
* An active email mailbox on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise plan](https://www.qboxmail.it/prezzi/confronta-piani/) to access the Address Book and Calendar sharing services
* Windows 10
* Microsoft Mail
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
Microsoft Mail has been available in Windows since version 8 and can be used with all plans and all mailboxes on the Qboxmail platform.
### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure your Qboxmail email account in Microsoft Mail, you need to use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* In the side menu, click **Accounts**
* In the window that opens on the screen, click **Add account**
* Select **Advanced setup**
* Click **Internet email**
In the configuration window that opens, enter the connection settings for the email account you want to configure:
* Email address: **email address to configure**
* User name: **same as the email address**
* Password: **the account password**
* Account name: an identifier for the account you entered
* Send your messages using this name: name to display in the sender field
* Incoming email server: **imap.qboxmail.com**
* Account type: **IMAP4**
* Outgoing (SMTP) email server: **smtp.qboxmail.com**
After checking that all the other options are selected, click **Sign in**.
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers to set in users’ email clients. By using White Label parameters, all direct references to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the [PDF with the White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) (login required) for accessing the services from the customer area after signing in.
# Microsoft Outlook (/en/guides/configurations/microsoft-outlook)
In this guide we will configure the Microsoft Outlook client to access the email, address book, and calendar services offered by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it).
This makes it possible to keep the email, address book, and calendars available in [Webmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/webmail/) synchronized with Microsoft Outlook as well. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible in Outlook, and vice versa.
If you need to configure your email account using *Microsoft® Exchange
ActiveSync*, [go to the dedicated
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/guides/configurations/protocols/exchange-activesync).
### What you need [#what-you-need]
* An active email account on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise plan](https://www.qboxmail.it/prezzi/confronta-piani/) to access the Address Book and Calendar sharing services
* Microsoft Outlook (version 2013 or later recommended)
* CalDAV Synchronizer plugin (downloadable [here](https://caldavsynchronizer.org/download-2/?target=_blank))
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
There are no minimum requirements for using Outlook exclusively as an email client configured with POP/IMAP and SMTP. To also use Outlook as a calendar and address book client, we recommend using version 2013 or later and the CalDAV Synchronizer plugin updated to the latest version.
Access to the Address Book and Calendar sharing services is available only
for domains with a Professional or Enterprise plan
### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure the Qboxmail email account, you must use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* Click the **File** menu
* Click the **Add account** button
* In the window that opens on screen, enter the email address to configure
* Click **Advanced options** and select **Let me set up my account manually**
* Continue by clicking **Connect**
* Select **IMAP** from the available options
In the screen that opens, set the following configuration parameters
Incoming Mail
* Server: **imap.qboxmail.com**
* Port: **993**
* Encryption method: **SSL/TLS**
Outgoing Mail
* Server: **smtp.qboxmail.com**
* Port: **465**
* Encryption method: **SSL/TLS**
Then confirm by clicking the **Next** button.
* Enter the email account password
* Click **Connect**
* Confirm that the email account has been added correctly by clicking **Done**
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers to set in users’ email clients. By using the White Label parameters, any direct reference to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the [PDF with the White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) (login required) for accessing the services from the customer area after signing in.
### Calendar and Address Book configuration [#calendar-and-address-book-configuration]
To enable synchronization and sharing of the address book and calendar available on the Qboxmail platform, you must install the Outlook plugin from the link in the [What you need](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/guides/configurations/microsoft-outlook#what-you-need) section.
After downloading the plugin, unzip the zip file, double-click the Setup file in the folder, and complete the installation procedure. When finished, open Outlook, or restart it if it was already open.
After restarting Outlook, follow these steps:
* Click the **CalDav Synchronizer** tab
* Open **Synchronization Profiles**
* Click the second icon (green + with white squares)
* In the window that opens on screen, select **Sogo** and confirm by clicking the ok button
The fields to configure the connection to the Qboxmail platform will then appear on screen.
* Name: choose a profile name
* DAV URL: [https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/](https://dav.qboxmail.com/SOGo/dav/)
* Username: the email address of the account to configure
* Password: the account password
* Email address: the email address configured in Outlook
After filling in these fields, search for the calendars and address books on the server by clicking **Discover resources and assign to Outlook folders.**
In the window that opens on screen, you can choose or create the folders where the contacts/calendars found by the plugin should be saved. To do this, click the … button corresponding to each resource found. If you need to create new folders, make sure the folder content is correct (calendar-type items or contact-type items).
After finishing the folder configuration, you can specify the interval in minutes for automatic resource synchronization (30 minutes by default) and other preferences. Then confirm by clicking the ok button.
To run the first synchronization:
* Click the **CalDav Synchronizer** tab
* Click **Synchronize now**
# Mozilla Thunderbird (/en/guides/configurations/mozilla-thunderbird)
In this guide, we will configure the Mail, Contacts, and Calendar programs in Mozilla Thunderbird to access the email, address book, and calendar services offered by [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.com).
This way, your email, address book, and calendars in Webmail will always stay synchronized with Mozilla Thunderbird. New contacts or events created in Webmail will also be visible in Mozilla Thunderbird and vice versa.
If you need to configure your email account using Microsoft® Exchange
ActiveSync [go to the dedicated
guide](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/protocols/exchange-activesync).
### What you need [#what-you-need]
* An active email account on Qboxmail
* A domain with a [Professional or Enterprise](https://www.qboxmail.com/pricing/compare-plans/) plan to access sharing services
* Mozilla Thunderbird (version 60 or higher, downloadable [here](https://www.thunderbird.net))
* Qboxmail Plugin (downloadable [here](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/index.php/download/category/2/Plugin-Sogo.html))
### Compatibility [#compatibility]
We recommend using Thunderbird version 68 or later to ensure the best user experience.
The Qboxmail plugin depends on the Thunderbird version you use (version 60 or 68), the plan you use, and whether you need to use white label services. You therefore need to choose the appropriate plugin from those available.
Access to the Address Book and Calendar sharing services is available only
for domains with a Professional or Enterprise plan
#### Email configuration [#email-configuration]
To configure the Qboxmail email account in Mozilla Thunderbird, you need to use the POP or IMAP protocols to receive messages and SMTP to send them.
* In the Thunderbird menu ( ☰ ), click **Settings**
* Click **Account Settings**
* In the window that opens on screen, click **Account Actions**
* Choose **Add Mail Account**
Here you can enter the details for your email account.
* Name: the name to display as the sender in emails sent from the program
* Email address: your email address, which is also the username for the email account
* Password: the email account password
On this screen, you need to manually set the [connection parameters](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/configurations/access-parameters) for Qboxmail email services.
For Resellers, White Label access parameters are available to configure in users’ email clients. By using White Label parameters, any direct reference to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the PDF file with the [White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) (login required) for accessing the services from the customer area after logging in.
The username, which corresponds to the email address, and the password are the same for both the incoming and outgoing server.
To check and validate the settings entered, click the “Re-test” button to run a connection test.
Once the configuration is complete, click the “Done” button to close the window, and Thunderbird will start synchronizing the account’s mail.
### Address Book configuration [#address-book-configuration]
To synchronize and share the Qboxmail address book with Thunderbird, you need to install the plugin from the link provided earlier in the “What you need” section. Depending on the Thunderbird version installed on your computer, you need to choose the corresponding Connector and Integrator plugin version.
Since Thunderbird version 68, the Integrator plugin has been included in the Connector, so you only need to download the latter. Various plugin versions are also available depending on the subscribed plan and whether you need to use white label parameters.
Once you have downloaded the required files, you can install them by following these steps:
* In the menu ( ☰ ), click **Add-ons and Themes**
* Click **Extensions** again in the left sidebar
* Click the button with the ⚙ icon
* Select **Install Add-on From File…** and select the downloaded plugin
* Click **Add**
* Restart Thunderbird by clicking the **Restart** button
* Enter the details for the account to configure in the window that opens on screen
After this, the address book will be correctly configured and synchronized in Thunderbird.
To verify that the installation process was successful, you can view the address books by clicking the **Address Book** button on the action bar.
### Calendar configuration [#calendar-configuration]
To synchronize and share the calendar, you need to have subscribed to a Professional or Enterprise plan, as specified in the Compatibility section.
If the plan is compatible, after installing our plugin by following the procedure described in the previous section, the calendars configured on the Qboxmail platform and their events will also be visible in Thunderbird.
# MX record settings (/en/guides/configurations/mx-record-settings)
MX records define which mail servers emails addressed to a specific domain must be delivered to.
To receive emails addressed to your domain, active on Qboxmail, you must set the MX records we provide and remove the current ones through your provider’s DNS management panel.
You can use Qboxmail services regardless of the provider with which you registered your domain, as long as you have access to your domain’s DNS management panel.
### MX records with Qboxmail Label [#mx-records-with-qboxmail-label]
Remove the current MX records and replace them with the following:
Primary MX: mx01.qboxmail.com with priority 10
Secondary MX: mx02.qboxmail.com with priority 20
| Name/Host/Alias | Record type | Value priority | Destination |
| ---------------- | ----------- | -------------- | ----------------- |
| @ or leave blank | MX | 10 | mx01.qboxmail.com |
| @ or leave blank | MX | 20 | mx02.qboxmail.com |
Once you have changed your domain’s MX records, you can verify that they have been applied correctly from a terminal or shell by running the “nslookup” command, which should return a result similar to this:
*$ nslookup -q=mx esempio.it esempio.it mail exchanger = 10 mx01.qboxmail.com esempio.it mail exchanger = 20 mx02.qboxmail.com*
### White Label MX records [#white-label-mx-records]
White Label MX records are available for Resellers to set on users’ domains. By using White Label MX records, any direct reference to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the PDF file with the [White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) (login required) for service access from the customer area after logging in.
White Label configuration is included in the service fee.
### Private Label MX records [#private-label-mx-records]
If you have purchased the Private Label service, you can customize the MX records by entering your domain name.\
Private Label configuration is a project-based service and is not included in the service fee.
### Automatic MX record check [#automatic-mx-record-check]
The Qboxmail Control Panel periodically checks that DNS settings are correct and automatically indicates, with a red icon, which domains have encountered MX record issues. Once any issues have been fixed, you must wait for the outcome of the automatic checks on the following day.
A warning about issues with the domain’s DNS configuration does not automatically mean that the email service is not working; it is only an invitation to check that the MX record settings are correct.
# SPF record settings (/en/guides/configurations/spf-record-settings)
### What an SPF record is and what it is used for [#what-an-spf-record-is-and-what-it-is-used-for]
An SPF record is a setting, to be added to DNS, that defines which mail servers and IP addresses are authorized to send email on behalf of a specific domain.
By configuring an SPF record, you can tell recipient servers which IP addresses are authorized to send email using your domain name as the sender. This setting helps you increase your security and protect yourself from email scams.
Setting a correct SPF record reduces the likelihood that someone can use your domain to send spam or phishing emails and increases the chances that your message will not be marked as unwanted. Setting an SPF record is a very simple configuration to perform, has no additional cost, and has no impact on performance.
It is strongly recommended to set an SPF record for every active domain on
Qboxmail.
#### Set an SPF record [#set-an-spf-record]
To set the SPF record on your domain, you must access the DNS management panel of the provider where you registered the domain and add it as follows:
| Record Type | Value |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------------- |
| TXT | `v=spf1 include:spf.qboxmail.com mx a -all` |
The setting shown above also authorizes email sending by the server hosting your website.
Verification of the correctness of the SPF record is performed by the server that receives the email. After adding the record, it may take up to 24 hours for the DNS change to become fully operational.
### Set a White Label SPF record [#set-a-white-label-spf-record]
White Label SPF records are available for Resellers to set on users' domains. By using White Label SPF records, any direct reference to Qboxmail will be removed. You can download the PDF file with the [White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) for service configuration from the customer area after logging in.
White Label configuration is included in the service fee.
### Advanced settings to enable SPF records from other providers [#advanced-settings-to-enable-spf-records-from-other-providers]
If emails with your domain as the sender are also sent from other providers (e.g. Mailchimp), you must also add their SPF settings by adding their “include” entries as shown in the following example:
| Record Type | Value |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| TXT | `v=spf1 include:spf.qboxmail.com include:servers.mcsv.net mx a -all` |
If, for example, the IP address of your company mail server (or SMTP dedicated to sending DEM) were 151.2.3.4, you would need to enter the following in DNS:
| Record Type | Value |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| TXT | `v=spf1 include:spf.qboxmail.com ip4:151.2.3.4/32 mx a -all` |
Refer to the technical support of your current DNS service provider for the correct settings in your DNS control panel.
Make sure you publish *only one TXT record* that includes all the necessary
SPF entries
### Verify the correct SPF record setting in DNS [#verify-the-correct-spf-record-setting-in-dns]
Qboxmail servers can in turn validate the SPF record for incoming emails and add a header that reports the result of this validation. The header can be viewed by opening the message source and appears in this form: Received-SPF: pass (0: SPF record at spf.qboxmail.com designates 185.97.218.202 as permitted sender)Received-SPF: pass (0: SPF record at spf.qboxmail.com designates 185.97.218.202 as permitted sender)
When the result is “pass”, it means that the SPF record of the email sender is configured correctly.
To verify that the SPF record is correctly set on your domain, you can run the nslookup command from a terminal:
```
nslookup -q=txt example.com
```
which should return:
```
example.com text = “v=spf1 include:spf.qboxmail.com mx a -all
```
You can also use our [dedicated tool](https://www.qboxmail.com/toolbox/domain-verify/) to check whether a given IP address is present in your domain's SPF record.
The last parameter of the record can be set as HardFail (-all) or SoftFail (\~all). The difference is that -all instructs recipient servers to reject messages from your domain if they do not come from one of the IPs specified in the SPF record, while with \~all messages coming from unauthorized IPs are still accepted but may be penalized.
# Accounts (/en/guides/email-delivery/accounts)
### **Add an account** [#add-an-account]
To add a new account, select *Accounts* from the Control Panel sidebar.
If no accounts exist yet, click the `+ Create account` button in the center of the page to create the first account. If other accounts already exist, click the `+ Account` button above the table, on the right side of the page.
Then follow the instructions shown in the different steps to complete the operation.
#### **Step 1 - New account: Description and type** [#step-1---new-account-description-and-type]
Enter a description that lets you easily identify the account’s purpose, for example “Hotel newsletter” or “Hotel booking confirmations”.
We recommend using a clear and recognizable description, because the account username is automatically generated by the system as a random combination of letters and numbers for security reasons. The description is therefore the most immediate way to distinguish the different accounts within the platform.
During creation, you must also select the sending type associated with the account, choosing between transactional or promotional messages.
#### **Step 2 - Account plan** [#step-2---account-plan]
Select the type of plan you want to activate by choosing from:
* **Free**: each customer can have only one active account with a Free plan.
* **Monthly subscription.**
* **Prepaid package**: messages purchased with this option are valid for one year. In the case of subsequent purchases, the expiration date will be extended automatically.
After choosing the plan, select the desired number of messages using the available slider. If the Free plan has been selected, you cannot change the number of messages proposed by the system.
You can create only one account with a free plan.
The price will be updated automatically based on the combination of the selected plan and the chosen number of messages.
#### **Step 3 - Payment method** [#step-3---payment-method]
If you are a new Qboxmail customer, during the procedure you will be asked to enter your personal details and accept the contractual clauses required to activate the service.
You can then choose your preferred payment method. If you are already a Qboxmail customer, you will be taken directly to payment method selection.
The accepted payment methods are:
* **Credit card with automatic charge**: automates invoice payment using your credit/debit card. All major networks are accepted, for example Visa, Mastercard, and American Express. The charge will be made on the invoice due date.
* **PayPal with automatic charge**: automates invoice payment using your PayPal account. The charge will be made on the invoice due date.
* **PayPal with manual charge**: make the payment using your PayPal account. You will need to pay invoices manually by following the instructions in the proforma invoice by the due date.
#### **Step 4 - Summary** [#step-4---summary]
This step summarizes the options selected for the new account, together with the total expected cost.
If the **Free** plan has been selected, clicking the `Activate` button will activate the account immediately and you can proceed directly to the next step.
If a paid plan has been selected instead, you will need to click the `Order` button to send the request to our systems. You will receive an email containing the order summary and the link to complete the payment. Once payment has been received, the account will be activated within 24 hours.
### **Account list** [#account-list]
The initial screen of the accounts section shows all created accounts. The following information is displayed for each account:
* Status
* Account (that is, the description entered when the account was created)
* Username
* Domains (indication of the number of domains used compared with the maximum included in the plan)
* Remaining messages
* Type (transactional or promotional)
* Plan
Just above the account list there is a quick status filter. The possible statuses are:
| Status | Description |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------- |
|

| Enabled |
|

| Awaiting payment |
|

| Disabled |
|

| Blocked |
In addition to filtering accounts by status, you can perform an advanced search using additional criteria through the `Filter` button:
* **Type**: lets you select the type of messages associated with the account, such as transactional or promotional emails.
* **Plan**: lets you filter accounts based on the active plan.
* **Messages**: lets you set a range for the remaining available messages.
To apply the selected criteria and activate advanced search, click the `Apply filters` button.
### **Account details** [#account-details]
By clicking one of the created accounts, you can access all information and settings related to the selected account.
The content is organized within a secondary sidebar, which lets you easily navigate between the available sections.
#### **Dashboard** [#dashboard]
This section displays a micro-dashboard showing some data related to the account itself. These include:
* Account details
* Messages: this section shows the number of messages used compared with the total available through a dedicated progress bar. If extra messages are present, their usage is also displayed. From the same box, you can also change the plan using the `Change plan` button or purchase additional messages using the `Purchase extra messages` button.
* Trend: this chart shows the daily sending trend during the month, highlighting the breakdown of messages between sent, delivered, suppressed, and those that generated a bounce.
#### **Domains** [#domains]
This section lists the domains already associated with the account and their status. You can also create a new association.
Click the `+ Associate domain` button and select the domain to associate.
If the button is disabled, it means the account has reached the maximum number of domains that can be associated and you will need to create a new account to use other domains, or remove one of the associations.
You can associate a maximum of 250 domains per account.
#### **Details and credentials** [#details-and-credentials]
In this section you can view and manage the account’s main information.
The **Description** item lets you enter identifying text useful for easily recognizing the account within the platform.
The **Credentials** section, instead, contains the parameters required to configure the connection to the SMTP server.
The credentials can be used both in email clients and in applications with email sending features, such as e-commerce platforms, management software, or email marketing platforms.
Use these parameters:
| Parameter | Value |
| ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| SMTP server | `delivery.qboxmail.com` |
| Port | `465` |
| Connection security | Implicit SSL/TLS |
| Username | The username shown in the **Credentials** section |
| Password | The password shown or generated in the **Credentials** section |
`smtp.qboxmail.com` is the SMTP server for Email Hosting. For an Email Delivery account, use `delivery.qboxmail.com`.
For the complete reference, see [SMTP configuration](/en/guides/email-delivery/external-systems-configuration).
#### **Protection and deliverability** [#protection-and-deliverability]
This section contains the settings dedicated to managing deliverability and account security.
With the **Bounce alert** option, you can specify an alternative email address where you want to receive notifications about undelivered messages.
The **Suppression list** item lets you decide whether to apply or ignore the suppression list associated with the account during sending.
Through **IP access control**, you can instead limit access and sending to authorized IP addresses only.
If the field is left empty, access will be allowed from any IP.
To add an authorized IP address, simply enter it in the dedicated field and click the `+` button.
To remove an already configured IP address, click the icon in the corresponding row of the table.
#### **API Token** [#api-token]
The **API Token** section lets you create and manage tokens used to send messages through the Qboxmail Send API.
These tokens are linked to the selected Email Delivery account and must be used as Bearer tokens when calling the Send API:
```bash
-H "Authorization: Bearer "
```
To create a token, click `Create new token`, enter a recognizable name, and generate it. Copy and save the token immediately: the full value is shown only once. After closing the creation window, only a masked preview will be visible.
If you lose the token, you cannot view it again. Delete it and create a new one.
The token list shows the token name, masked preview, creation date, and last usage date.
By opening a token, you can configure **IP Access Control**. Leave the list empty to allow requests from any IP address, or add trusted IP addresses/CIDR ranges to restrict where the token can be used from. Token IP restrictions are applied in addition to the account-level IP access control configured in **Protection and deliverability**.
To revoke access, delete the token.
For Send API usage examples, see [Send API](/en/api/send-api).
#### **Service management** [#service-management]
In this section you can manage the plan associated with the account and service-related operations.
With the **Change plan** option, you can modify the active plan by choosing between Free, Subscription, or Prepaid.
The new plan will be activated once payment has been completed. Any unused remaining messages will be lost when the plan is changed.
The **Terminate service** function lets you permanently delete the account.
Associated domains will not be removed, while addresses in the suppression list will be deleted.
Before proceeding, we therefore recommend exporting the suppression list if you want to keep its contents.
# Activation (/en/guides/email-delivery/activation)
To activate Email Delivery, complete the [activation form](https://www.qboxmail.com/free-smtp/) by entering your first name, last name, and email address, selecting your country and language, and accepting the [Terms of Service](https://www.qboxmail.com/terms-of-service/) and personal data processing under the [Privacy Policy](https://www.qboxmail.com/privacy/).
Once registration is complete, you will receive an email with the procedure to follow to set the password for accessing the Control Panel and verify your account.
### **First login** [#first-login]
After receiving the email with the first-login link, you will be redirected to the onboarding section. Here, in just a few steps, you will be asked to set a password, indicate the service you are interested in, and specify your type of business.
You can change your password at any time by accessing the *Settings* section
of the panel.
Once you have entered the panel, you can start using Email Delivery by creating your first free account, which includes 5,000 messages per month with no expiration date.
You will be guided through the configuration so you can start sending messages.
# Activity log (/en/guides/email-delivery/activity-log)
The activity log lists all activities performed by accounts associated with a specific Admin and related to the use of Qboxmail services. The log is also an analysis tool for operations performed in the event of errors or security breaches.
For each action, the following information is shown:
* Date when the action was performed
* Account of the user who performed the action
* Brief description of the action performed
* Country where the action was performed
* Details, where the technical system log excerpt for the action performed is displayed
You can **filter** actions by:
* Time interval in which the actions were performed
* User who performed the actions
* Type of action
* Object of the actions
* Area of interest of the actions
# Available plans (/en/guides/email-delivery/available-plans)
Qboxmail’s Email Delivery service can be purchased in the following ways:
* ;
* ;
* ;
* .
### **Free plan** [#free-plan]
The free plan lets you send promotional or transactional email messages to an unlimited number of recipients with a maximum volume of 5,000 messages per month. The free plan can be converted at any time to the prepaid plan or to the monthly subscription plan.
### **Prepaid sending packages** [#prepaid-sending-packages]
For those who need to send small quantities of messages occasionally, the prepaid sending package is the best solution. Customers purchase the number of sends they expect to use over the next 12 months, giving them the flexibility to use the sends gradually or, if needed, all together over a short period of time. Customers can also purchase multiple prepaid sending packages, adding up the number of available sends, or purchase another package when the remaining sends are about to run out.
### **Monthly subscriptions** [#monthly-subscriptions]
The monthly subscription and billing plan is designed for those who need to send large volumes of messages consistently or very frequently, such as order confirmations or marketing messages. The plan offers a competitive cost and a wider range of services than the other plans (for example, the ability to customize headers with your own domain name or request a dedicated sending pool).
To purchase extra messages, access the Email Delivery panel, select the *Accounts* section, and locate the desired account. Then open the account details and go to the *Dashboard* section: inside the Sends box you will find the `Buy extra messages` button.
The charge is based on the number of packages selected. You can purchase a
minimum of 5 packages.
# Dashboard (/en/guides/email-delivery/dashboard)
After logging in to Email Delivery, you will be automatically redirected to the *Dashboard* section of the Control Panel. The dashboard is always accessible from the sidebar through the *Dashboard* item.
This page provides several high-level monitoring parameters that are useful for tracking the overall performance of the service.
The displayed parameters are:
* **Monthly performance**: overview of sending activity and the main deliverability metrics for the current period. In particular:
* *Total sends*: shows the total number of emails sent in the current month compared with the previous five months;
* *Bounce rate*: indicates the percentage of messages that were not delivered correctly to recipients and were returned to the sender. The value is shown through a trend chart and a visual risk level indicator. A bounce rate is considered:
* good below 0.5%;
* to be monitored between 0.5% and 1%;
* critical above 1%;
* *Suppressed*: represents the percentage of addresses added to the suppression list compared with the total number of messages sent. In this case as well, an indicator related to list quality is shown:
* stable below 0.5%;
* increasing between 0.5% and 1%;
* at risk above 1%.
* **Sending usage**: shows the percentage of sends used compared with the total available, allowing you to quickly monitor the usage of the active plan. The 5 accounts consuming the most messages are shown.
* **Trend**: shows the daily distribution of sends in the selected period. By default, the current month is displayed, but you can browse previous months to view the sending history. For each day, the following are shown:
* the total number of sends performed, represented by the height of the bar;
* the number of emails delivered correctly;
* the number of emails that generated a bounce;
* the number of suppressed emails.
* **Monitoring and alerts**: collects alerts and notifications related to the service status. Notifications are divided into Critical and Warning categories.
By opening the details of each notification, you can view the problem description and the elements involved.
# Data export (/en/guides/email-delivery/data-export)
The Data Export feature lets you **export monitoring data in CSV format**.
### **What can you export?** [#what-can-you-export]
* Suppression list
* Hosting email log analysis data
* Delivery email log analysis data
An `Export CSV` button has been added to each dedicated section. It lets you generate a file containing all data returned by the search and applied filters, even when the results span multiple pages.
If the button is disabled, it means there is no data to display and,
therefore, no data to export.
### **How export works** [#how-export-works]
After clicking `Export CSV`, a **summary modal** opens.
In the modal, you can:
* View the **summary of active filters**
* Check the **number of records** that will be exported
* Apply an additional filter by data type
**Filters available in the modal**
| **Email log analysis (both Hosting and Delivery)** | **Suppression list** |
| -------------------------------------------------- | -------------------- |
| `All results` | `All results` |
| `Delivered` | `Delivery blocked` |
| `Suppressed` | `Delivery enabled` |
| `Rejected` | - |
The number of records to export updates in real time based on the selected
filters.
If the number of results exceeds a certain threshold, generating the file may take a few minutes.
In this case, the user is notified directly in the modal before starting file preparation.
#### **What happens after starting the export** [#what-happens-after-starting-the-export]
After confirming the export, two scenarios are possible:
* **Immediate export:** the file is generated and downloaded within a few seconds.
* **Asynchronous export:** for large amounts of data, the system starts preparing the file without downloading it immediately. In this case, a **loading indicator** will appear in the sidebar in the **Data Export** section.
The downloaded file will be a **.zip** containing the list split into multiple files, so that each individual file remains a reasonable and easily manageable size.
### **Data Export section** [#data-export-section]
The purpose of the **Data Export** section is to **centralize all processed files**.
The page is displayed as a **grid of cards**, each referring to an exported file. The grid is ordered chronologically and can be filtered by status.
The following information is available for each file:
* **Status**
* **Completed:** file generated correctly
* **Downloaded:** file already downloaded by the user
* **Processing:** file being generated
* **Failed:** error during generation or download
* **Expired:** file no longer available (deleted after 7 days)
* **Action**
* Download (if available) or processing indicator
* **Exported data type**
* Email log analysis (Hosting / Delivery)
* Suppression list
* **Number of records**
* **Number of active filters**
* With summary tooltip on mouse hover
* **Generation date**
* **Expiration date**
In the sidebar, next to the Data Export section, there are two visual elements:
* Number of files **ready for download**
* **Loading icon** when one or more files are being processed
When generation is complete, the user will receive an **email notification**.
Files being processed continue the process even if the browser is closed.
# Domains (/en/guides/email-delivery/domains)
### **Add a new domain** [#add-a-new-domain]
To add a new domain, select *Domains* from the Control Panel sidebar.
If no domains have been added yet, click the `+ Add domain` button in the center of the page to add the first domain.
If other domains have already been added, click the `+ Domain` button above the table, on the right side of the page.
Then follow the instructions shown in the different steps to complete the operation.
#### **Step 1 - Add domain for sending** [#step-1---add-domain-for-sending]
First, enter the full domain name, including the extension, for example *mydomain.com*.
The domain entered must not already exist in the Email Delivery system; otherwise, you will be asked to use a different name.
If the domain passes this first verification step, it will be created correctly. However, before it can be used to send emails, it must complete additional verification and approval procedures, described in the following steps.
#### **Step 2 - Operation feedback** [#step-2---operation-feedback]
If the domain has been added successfully, a confirmation message will be shown in the summary step.
At this point, you will need to proceed with domain verification.
You can access the procedure using the `Go to verification` button, available at the bottom right, or through the link on the `DNS parameters` page.
#### **Step 3 - Verify DNS parameters** [#step-3---verify-dns-parameters]
There are several ways to access the DNS parameters section to be verified:
* click the `Go to verification` button, available at the bottom right of the summary page;
* use the `DNS parameters` link on the same page;
* select *Domains* from the Control Panel sidebar, click the desired domain to access its details, and then open the *DNS parameters* section from the dedicated sidebar.
Once the section is open, copy the values for SPF, DKIM, and DMARC verification and enter them in your domain’s DNS management system.
After completing the configuration, return to the panel and click the *Verify domain* button, available at the top right of the DNS Parameters page.
The system will automatically verify the parameters and update the status of the related records.
If verification is not successful, the following error message will be shown:
Parameter verified, but it contains errors. Check the configuration.
In this case, check that the DNS parameters have been entered correctly in the domain configuration.
If you want to entrust the configuration to a colleague or external technician, you can use the
`Share parameters` button to generate a text file containing all SPF, DKIM, and DMARC values, ready to be forwarded.
#### **Domain list** [#domain-list]
The initial screen of the domains section shows all added domains. For each account, the following information is provided:
* Status
* Domain
* Associated accounts
Domains can be filtered by their status using the tabs above the table.
The available statuses are:
| Status | Description |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------- |
|

| Enabled |
|

| Pending verification |
|

| Invalid DKIM |
|

| Disabled |
|

| Blocked |
#### **Domain details** [#domain-details]
By clicking one of the added domains, you can access all information and settings related to the selected domain.
The content is organized within a secondary sidebar, which makes it easy to navigate between the different available sections.
#### **Associated accounts** [#associated-accounts]
In this section, you can view the list of accounts associated with the selected domain.
To associate the domain with a new account, click the `+ Associate account` button. A modal containing all available accounts will open.
Select the accounts you want to associate with the domain using the checkboxes, that is, the accounts that will be authorized to send emails using that domain, then click the `Associate` button to complete the operation.
If no accounts have been created yet, you will need to create at least one before you can proceed with the association.
For more information, see the [Add an account](/en/guides/email-delivery/accounts#add-an-account) section.
#### **DNS parameters** [#dns-parameters]
This section displays all the parameters required for domain verification.
The records required for configuration are:
*
SPF
* DKIM signature, which requires the
configuration of two CNAME records for greater security
*
DMARC
Using the button, you can quickly copy the record values and paste them into the domain’s DNS management system.
Once the configuration is complete, clicking the `Verify` button will allow the system to check that the DNS records are configured correctly.
You can also use the `Share parameters` button to generate a text file containing all SPF, DKIM, and DMARC values.
Each domain shows a status that helps you quickly identify the situation:
* **Not verified**: the records have not been configured yet or the configuration contains errors.
* **Verified**: the records have been configured correctly and verification was successful.
#### **Approval** [#approval]
Once the verification phase has been completed successfully, the domain must also pass the approval phase, which is performed automatically by our systems.
In this section, you can monitor the progress of the approval procedure.
A notification email will be sent with updates about the domain status.
# Email log analysis (/en/guides/email-delivery/email-log-analysis)
This section lets you view and analyze outgoing email traffic logs in real time.
Email log analysis keeps a history of up to 30 days.
To view email logs, select *Email log analysis* from the control panel sidebar.
Once the page is open, the main tabs divide messages by general status:
* Processed
* Queued
* Error
Each main tab also includes a series of secondary tabs that let you further filter the displayed logs based on the specific message status:
* **processed** messages can be filtered by:
* delivered
* suppressed
* rejected
* **queued** messages have no additional tabs;
* messages with **errors** can instead be filtered by:
* authentication errors
* limit exceeded
* other generic errors
In addition to the secondary tabs, you can apply filters to the displayed table. By clicking the `Filter` button, you can apply filters for:
* Account
* Domain
* Sender
* Recipient
* Message subject
* Date range
#### **Delivered messages** [#delivered-messages]
For each delivered message, the following data is displayed:
| **Sent** | |
| -------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| `Date` | Date and time the message was sent |
| `Sender` | Who sent the message |
| `Recipient` | Who the message was sent to |
| `Subject` | Message subject |
| `Account ID` | Account code |
| `Username` | Account username |
| `Medium` | Channel used to send the message |
| `Sending pool` | Sending pool used for delivery |
| `Sender IP` | IP address used to send the message |
| `SMTP ID` | SMTP transaction identifier |
| `Message ID` | Unique message identifier |
| `Size` | Message size |
| **Delivered** | |
| ------------- | ------------------------------------------- |
| `Date` | Date and time the message was delivered |
| `Relay` | Remote server that accepted the message |
| `Response` | SMTP response returned by the remote server |
#### **Suppressed messages** [#suppressed-messages]
For each suppressed message, the following data is displayed:
| **Sent** | |
| -------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| `Date` | Date and time the message was sent |
| `Sender` | Who sent the message |
| `Recipient` | Who the message was sent to |
| `Subject` | Message subject |
| `Account ID` | Account code |
| `Username` | Account username |
| `Medium` | Channel used to send the message |
| `Sending pool` | Sending pool used for delivery |
| `Sender IP` | IP address used to send the message |
| `SMTP ID` | SMTP transaction identifier |
| `Message ID` | Unique message identifier |
| `Size` | Message size |
#### **Rejected messages** [#rejected-messages]
For each rejected message, the following data is displayed:
| **Sent** | |
| -------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| `Date` | Date and time the message was sent |
| `Sender` | Who sent the message |
| `Recipient` | Who the message was sent to |
| `Subject` | Message subject |
| `Account ID` | Account code |
| `Username` | Account username |
| `Medium` | Channel used to send the message |
| `Sending pool` | Sending pool used for delivery |
| `Sender IP` | IP address used to send the message |
| `SMTP ID` | SMTP transaction identifier |
| `Message ID` | Unique message identifier |
| `Size` | Message size |
| **Rejected** | |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------- |
| `Date` | Date and time the message was rejected |
| `Relay` | Remote server that rejected the message |
| `Response` | SMTP response returned by the remote server |
| **Non-delivery notification** | |
| ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------- |
| `MX IP` | IP address of the remote MX server |
| `MX Host` | Hostname of the remote MX server |
| `Date` | Date and time of the notification |
| `Subject` | Message subject |
| `Recipient` | Who the message was sent to |
| `SMTP result` | SMTP result reported in the notification |
| `Return Path` | Address the notification is sent to |
| `Subject` | Message subject |
Email log analysis can be exported in CSV format using the `Export CSV` button.
The generated file will take into account any filters applied to the current
view. Exported files will be available in the *Data Export* section.
# SMTP configuration (/en/guides/email-delivery/external-systems-configuration)
Use the following parameters to configure an email client, website, or application to send through Qboxmail Email Delivery.
| Parameter | Value |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
| SMTP server | `delivery.qboxmail.com` |
| Port | `465` |
| Connection security | Implicit SSL/TLS |
| Username | Your Email Delivery account username |
| Password | Your Email Delivery account password |
You can find the username and password in the Control Panel. Open **Email Delivery > Accounts**, select the account, and go to **Details and credentials**.
`smtp.qboxmail.com` is the SMTP server for Email Hosting. For an Email Delivery account, use `delivery.qboxmail.com`.
Before sending messages, associate the sender domain with the account and complete its DNS verification. For more information, see [Domains](/en/guides/email-delivery/domains).
# Getting started (/en/guides/email-delivery/getting-started)
## **Service overview** [#service-overview]
Email Delivery is the Qboxmail
service designed for sending large volumes of email messages through the
SMTP protocol. Email Delivery can be
used to send
transactional or
promotional email
messages.
The service is designed for customers who need to send large volumes of email messages with no hourly or daily limits, directly from their applications such as e-commerce platforms, management and invoicing software, and marketing applications for sending newsletters, simply by configuring the traditional SMTP protocol.
Service configuration and management are available in the Qboxmail Control Panel.
### **What is an SMTP server?** [#what-is-an-smtp-server]
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is a way to send email from one mail server to another.
An SMTP server lets you send email messages through a dedicated tool configured in the best possible way to maximize the delivery effectiveness of sent messages. Each SMTP session supports a maximum of 150 recipients.
### **Service benefits** [#service-benefits]
Qboxmail Email Delivery was developed to simplify management issues. For this reason, the following distinctive features have been implemented, with special attention to reputation management:
* Each customer's sending reputation is isolated and separate from that of other users without the need to purchase a dedicated IP address;
* Dedicated sending reputation and suppression lists that are separate for each account;
* Customers are automatically and constantly repositioned on the sending pool best suited to them;
* Monthly subscription plans or annual prepaid plans;
* Ability to keep sending even after reaching the purchased message limit;
* Ability for each customer to create multiple accounts and purchase a dedicated plan for each one.
### **Why choose Qboxmail Email Delivery?** [#why-choose-qboxmail-email-delivery]
* **Maximum flexibility in sending plans** – Free, prepaid, monthly subscription;
* **Sending pools and reputation per customer** – Multiple sending pools based on customer needs, with a dedicated reputation separate from other customers;
* **Deliverability** – The service has been designed to guarantee all customers the best possible deliverability, preventing abuse and rewarding those who send quality content;
* **Extra email messages** – To never run out of sends, purchase extra message packages to handle peak periods (orders or bookings) in exceptional cases, during holidays, or during promotions;
* **Technical support** – The Qboxmail team is always available to help you resolve any deliverability issues;
* **Service reliability** – We are the developers of the sending platform and can guarantee the best quality for the email sending service, even at high volumes;
* **Control Panel/Features** – Through the Control Panel, you manage your accounts, the domains authorized for sending, monitor reputation, and manage suppression lists.
## **Who the service is for** [#who-the-service-is-for]
The service is intended for anyone who needs an email message sending service through the SMTP protocol, whether for occasionally sending small quantities of messages or continuously sending large quantities of messages.
### **Sending transactional email messages** [#sending-transactional-email-messages]
The service is suitable for those who want to send transactional email messages, such as:
* Web agencies that need to provide an SMTP service for their customers' websites and applications;
* Software developers who need to install an email sending system in the software they develop;
* System integrators who need to enable their customers' management systems, printers, and scanners to send email messages;
* E-commerce owners and couriers who need to send email messages for order confirmations, password recovery, and package shipping confirmations;
* Developers of management systems for hotels and restaurants who need to send booking confirmation email messages.
### **Sending promotional messages** [#sending-promotional-messages]
The service is suitable for those who want to send promotional email messages (marketing and newsletters), such as:
* Web agencies that need to send newsletters for their customers through their applications;
* E-commerce owners and couriers who need to send newsletters to their customers;
* Developers of management systems for hotels and restaurants who need to send promotional messages for their customers through the management systems they develop.
Qboxmail Email Delivery is particularly suitable both for customers who need to send a few messages occasionally, with the option to purchase prepaid sending packages to use as needed, and for customers who need to send large volumes by purchasing a monthly subscription at competitive costs.
# Email Delivery (/en/guides/email-delivery)
This section will collect guides dedicated to Email Delivery.
Management
Monitoring
# Multi-level (/en/guides/email-delivery/multi-level)
Multi-level management in the Control Panel lets customers safely delegate day-to-day management of email accounts and domains, both inside and outside the organization. With customizable roles, you can assign permissions based on operational needs, improve collaboration, and keep access secure.
### **Administrator** [#administrator]
The Administrator role is used by the Qboxmail customer or Reseller to manage all active resources and create users who can manage all or part of the active services.
### **Team Member** [#team-member]
A Team Member is a collaborator of the Administrator, usually an internal company user. Team Members can access company resources without visibility into sensitive information, such as prices or billing details.
#### **Who can create a Team Member?** [#who-can-create-a-team-member]
A Team Member can only be created by the Administrator.
#### **What can a Team Member do?** [#what-can-a-team-member-do]
A Team Member can manage all domains and accounts within the limits set by the Administrator.
With this role, you can:
* View and manage all customer resources, including domains and email accounts, within the limits set by the Administrator.
* Perform operations such as creating, editing, and deleting email accounts.
* Customize permissions so the Administrator controls which actions the Team Member can perform.
The Administrator retains full control over the resources and decides which
operations to allow, ensuring secure and targeted access to the Control Panel
features.
### **Manager** [#manager]
A Manager is a reseller or external collaborator who manages specific company resources without full access to all customer information. This role is ideal for delegating operations securely with limited access.
#### **Who can create a Manager?** [#who-can-create-a-manager]
Only an Administrator with reseller status can create, activate, or deactivate a Manager. An authorized Team Member can also do this.
#### **What can a Manager do?** [#what-can-a-manager-do]
A Manager can manage specific domains and their associated accounts. A Manager can:
* Manage email accounts, domains, and associated mailboxes.
* Perform domain and account imports and migrations.
* Access monitoring tools such as Tracemail and audit reports.
* Manage email sending without viewing prices or billing information.
The Administrator can set limits on the resources a Manager can manage, such as
the maximum number of email accounts or the number of sends allowed for each
domain.
### **Resource assignment** [#resource-assignment]
When assigning a Manager or Team Member role, the Control Panel lets you select the resources, such as email accounts and domains, that the role can access. For Email Delivery management, all resources linked to an account are automatically assigned, ensuring full visibility and control over connected resources.
# Overview (/en/guides/email-delivery/overview)
Configuring the Email Delivery bulk sending service is based on the four key steps described below.
1. **Create an account**
The first step to start sending emails is to create an account. Once registration is complete, the credentials needed to use the service and send your messages will be generated.
You can create all the accounts you need, assigning each one the plan that best suits your needs (Free, monthly subscription, or prepaid package).
2. **Add a domain**
To start sending emails, you need to add your domains within the platform. Once configured, domains must complete the verification and approval procedures required by the system before they can be used for sending.
3. **Account-domain association**
Associate each account with the domains you intend to use to send emails with the subscribed plan. You can associate a variable number of domains with each account, depending on the plan.
4. **Configure your application**
To start sending messages with Email Delivery, you need to configure your email client or application using the SMTP parameters provided by the system. This configuration connects the software to the SMTP server responsible for sending emails.
## In detail [#in-detail]
# Report (/en/guides/email-delivery/report)
In the Reports section, you can download detailed reports for your domains and accounts in real time, in CSV format, so you have a collection of useful data to monitor your account performance or perform calculations and checks for billing your customers.
### **Download a report** [#download-a-report]
Log in to Email Hosting and go to the Reports section:
Choose which report you want to download.
Click the
`Download report`
button.
Reports are generated in standard CSV format, so they can be easily viewed and analyzed according to your needs with any spreadsheet program (Microsoft Excel, Numbers, Calc, etc.). You can then apply filters to the CSV files or process them through your own management and billing applications.
| **Report** | **Description** |
| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
| `Domains` | Details of all domains within an account. |
| `Domain aliases` | Details of all domain aliases within an account. |
| `Domain limits` | Details of the limits set on the domains within an account. |
| `Email accounts` | Details of all email accounts within an account. |
| `Email aliases` | Details of all email aliases within an account. |
| `Email archive` | Details of all email archives within an account. |
Domain reports also include the Manager, if any, assigned to a specific
domain.
Reports are only available to the administrator account of your panel. Team
Members and Managers cannot access Reports.
# Suppression list (/en/guides/email-delivery/suppression-list)
The suppression list contains all email addresses that must no longer receive communications.
This list includes addresses that generated a bounce or that reported received messages as spam (complaints).
Addresses that generate a bounce are automatically added to the suppression list, while addresses associated with complaints must be added manually.
Managing subscriptions and unsubscriptions for the lists used for promotional
campaigns remains the responsibility of the application used to send the
emails.
When sending a campaign, the suppression list automatically prevents sending to all contacts that must no longer receive communications, even if they are still present in one or more distribution lists.
Messages blocked by the suppression list are not counted among the sends performed by the account.
When manually adding one or more addresses, you can choose whether to apply the block globally or limit it to specific accounts.
The following information is shown for each address:
* Delivery enabled/Not enabled
* Email address
* Account (indicates for which account that address is in the suppression list)
* Reason (bounce or complaint)
* Category (cause of the bounce)
* Date added
In the last column, using the button, you can remove the address from the suppression list or enable or disable email delivery.
The suppression list can be filtered to quickly find the desired addresses. Clicking the `Filter` button opens a side panel on the right side of the page containing the available filtering parameters.
The available filters are:
* **Accounts**: lets you filter addresses based on the accounts for which the block is active;
* **Delivery**: lets you view addresses with delivery enabled or disabled;
* **Reason**: filters addresses based on the reason they were added to the list, choosing between bounce and complaint;
* **Category**: lets you filter by problem category, such as capacity, DNS, or recipient;
* **Date** **added**: lets you filter addresses based on the date they were added to the suppression list.
To apply the selected criteria and activate advanced search, click the `Apply filters` button.
The suppression list can be exported in CSV format using the `Export CSV`
button. The generated file will take into account any filters applied to the
current view. Exported files will be available in the *Data Export* section.
### **Suppression list details** [#suppression-list-details]
Clicking one of the addresses in the suppression list lets you access all information and settings related to the selected address.
The content is organized within a secondary sidebar, which lets you easily navigate between the different available sections.
#### **Details** [#details]
In this section, you can view the details of why the address was added to the suppression list and for which accounts.
#### **Restrictions** [#restrictions]
This section shows the blocking rules associated with individual accounts.
Through the **Delivery status** item, you can choose whether to allow or block email delivery to the selected address.
In the **Involved accounts** section, you can define which accounts the restriction applies to.
The block can be extended to all accounts by enabling the dedicated toggle, or applied only to specific accounts by selecting them manually using checkboxes.
### **Add an address to the suppression list** [#add-an-address-to-the-suppression-list]
When a send is not delivered correctly, for example in the event of a bounce, the recipient’s address is automatically added to the suppression list.
You can also manually add addresses to which restriction rules should be applied, either by importing contact lists or by adding individual email addresses.
#### **Manually add an address to the suppression list** [#manually-add-an-address-to-the-suppression-list]
To add an address to the suppression list, select Suppression list in the Control Panel sidebar.
If there are no addresses yet, click the `+ Add address` button in the center of the page to import or add the first addresses.
If other addresses are already present, click the `+ Address` button above the table, on the right side of the page.
Once the *Add an email address to the suppression list* page opens, select the `Add single address` mode.
On this screen, you need to:
1. Enter the email address to add to the suppression list in the dedicated field;
2. Select the reason for the exclusion, choosing between **bounce** or **complaint**;
3. Configure the blocking rules, choosing whether to apply the restriction to all accounts or only to specific accounts;
4. Click the `Add` button at the bottom right to complete the operation.
At the end of the procedure, the address will be added to the suppression list
#### **Import a list of addresses** [#import-a-list-of-addresses]
To add an address to the suppression list, select Suppression list in the Control Panel sidebar.
If there are no addresses yet, click the `+ Add address` button in the center of the page to import or add the first addresses.
If other addresses are already present, click the `+ Address` button above the table, on the right side of the page.
Once the Add an email address to the suppression list page opens, select the `Import suppression list` mode.
On this screen, you can upload the suppression list file by dragging it into the box in the center of the page or
by clicking the box itself to select the desired file from your device.
Using the example `Download .CSV file` button, you can download a template that is useful for correctly creating the file to import,
reducing the risk of errors during upload or data processing.
You can import .CSV files containing up to 300 email addresses.
The .CSV file must follow this structure:
* **Email address**: the first column must contain the email address to add to the suppression list. This field is required.
* **Reason**: the second column must indicate the reason for adding the address to the suppression list. Accepted values are bounce or complaint. This field is required.
* **Sending account**: the third column can contain the account IDs (in the format SXXXXXXXXXX) to which the rule should be applied. If the field is left empty, the restriction will be applied to all accounts. To associate specific accounts, enter the IDs separated by commas.
After uploading the file, you can remove it by clicking the `Remove` button and repeat the upload operation.
Once the file is confirmed, click the `Add` button to start the import.
If the upload is completed correctly, all addresses in the file will be added to the suppression list.
If errors occur during the import, the box will show an error message that can be viewed in detail using the `Show details` button.
# Activation (/en/guides/email-hosting/activation)
To activate Qboxmail services, you need to sign up for the [free trial](https://www.qboxmail.com/free-trial/) by entering your first name, last name, and email address, selecting your country and language, and accepting the [Terms of Service](https://www.qboxmail.com/terms-of-service/) and the processing of personal data described in the [Privacy Policy](https://www.qboxmail.com/privacy/).
Once registration is complete, you will receive an email with the procedure to follow to set the password for accessing the control panel and verify your account.
### **First login** [#first-login]
After receiving the email with the link for your first login, you will be redirected to the onboarding section. Here, in just a few steps, you will be asked to set a password, indicate the service you are interested in, and specify your type of business.
You can change your password at any time by accessing the Settings section of
the panel.
Once you have logged in to the panel, you will be directed to the service home page, where you can choose whether to activate a 30-day free trial or proceed directly with service activation.
After activation, you can configure Email Hosting in three different ways:
* manually adding domains and email accounts;
* importing domains and email accounts via .csv file;
* migrating email accounts via .csv file.
# Available plans (/en/guides/email-hosting/available-plans)
Plans define the features and functionality available for a domain and for all its email accounts. You can take advantage of many features, available depending on the plan chosen for the domain.
### **Basic plan** [#basic-plan]
The Basic plan is designed for professionals or companies that want an affordable, high-quality service. It provides **access to all the basic features** for managing Qboxmail services, **essential security policies**, and the Mail and Address Book modules in Webmail, as well as Archive management and access to Mail Time Machine. With the Basic plan, email accounts with a **maximum size of 25 GB** can be activated.
### **Professional plan** [#professional-plan]
The Professional plan is intended for companies that need to coordinate and communicate with all their collaborators in a simple and intuitive way. It provides **access to advanced features** for managing Qboxmail services, **advanced security policies**, and the Mail, Address Book, and Calendar modules in Webmail, as well as Archive management and access to Mail Time Machine. With the Professional plan, email accounts with a **maximum size of 50 GB** can be activated.
### **Enterprise plan** [#enterprise-plan]
The Enterprise plan is designed for organizations that need advanced communication tools for their collaborators and a high level of security when using the services. It provides **access to advanced features** for managing Qboxmail services, **all available security policies**, and the Mail, Address Book, and Calendar modules, as well as Archive management and access to Mail Time Machine. With the Enterprise plan, email accounts with a **maximum size of 100 GB** can be activated.
### **Additional options** [#additional-options]
Additional services allow you to customize and increase the value of your email service offering. Additional options can be activated upon request by accessing the *Prices and additional options* page in the sidebar.
The following can be added to the active plan:
* **Web Label customization**: allows customization of email service URLs with your own domain and SSL, including Webmail and other modules;
* **Private Label customization**: allows you to customize all email services (POP, IMAP, SMTP, DAV, Webmail, and others) with your domain and a valid SSL certificate. It also includes MX and SPF records;
* **Security mail archive**: cloud archiving of sent and received messages, with search and export capabilities, retained for up to 10 years;
* **Backup restore**: restore email messages up to the previous 15 days using the account's Mail Time Machine;
* **Daily sending limits**: a message sending limit over 24 hours can be set for each email account. Up to 5000 messages per day can be added.
### **How to change a plan** [#how-to-change-a-plan]
A domain plan can be changed at any time through the Control Panel, via the domain settings.
Changing a plan not only changes the price, but also changes the features
available for the domain. When switching from a higher plan to a lower one,
data that does not correspond to the new plan will be lost.
# Getting started (/en/guides/email-hosting/getting-started)
## **Service overview** [#service-overview]
Email Hosting is Qboxmail’s service for managing business email in a centralized, secure, and flexible way.
The service includes a suite of intuitive and reliable tools that let you administer users, domains, and email services,
monitor activities, and protect business communications.
The suite includes:
*
Webmail
*
*
Archive
*
Mail Time Machine
All services can be customized for companies and resellers through white-label features, providing an experience fully integrated with your own brand.
### **Why choose Email Hosting?** [#why-choose-email-hosting]
Email Hosting is designed and developed entirely by our research and development department, offering several advantages, including:
* Centralized management of users, domains, and mailboxes
* Cross-platform access via Webmail, desktop clients, and mobile devices
* Synchronization of email, calendars, and contacts
* Automatic backup and message recovery with Mail Time Machine
* Secure email archiving
* Advanced account security and protection features
* Activity monitoring and log analysis
* Support for multi-level and white-label configurations
* Compatibility with major email clients
* APIs and automation tools for integrations and provisioning
### **Who the service is for** [#who-the-service-is-for]
Email Hosting is designed for companies and resellers that need a reliable, centralized platform for managing email communications.
The service is suitable for:
* Companies that want to manage professional mailboxes on custom domains
* Work teams that need shared tools for email, calendars, and contacts
* Resellers, MSPs, and System Integrators that want to offer email services to their customers
* Organizations that require advanced security, backup, and archiving features
* Businesses that need white-label solutions and multi-level management
* Companies that want to integrate email management with software and processes via APIs
# Email Hosting (/en/guides/email-hosting)
This section will collect all guides related to the Email Hosting product.
Webmail
Control Panel
Archive
Mail Time Machine
# Antispam and antivirus policies (/en/guides/features/antispam-antivirus-policies)
All email accounts hosted on our servers are protected by multiple Antispam and Antivirus layers. Protection is effective for both incoming and outgoing emails. Our antispam analysis systems are based on algorithms that calculate the positive and negative reputation of the sender IP, the URLs contained in messages, and a set of third-party commercial filters which, through Machine Learning techniques, can detect and block new spam and virus trends in real time. In addition, Qboxmail users are protected by dedicated antivirus signatures designed to block *0-day Ransomware*, meaning new variants of previously known attacks.
The first protection layer is at SMTP connection level. All remote servers connecting to our MX servers must meet the following requirements:
* A qualified (FQDN) and valid reverse DNS
* Not be listed in the main DNSBLs
* Present themselves with a valid FQDN HELO
If your server or its configuration does not follow these best practices, you will hardly be able to deliver your emails across the network.
### Antivirus [#antivirus]
The first analysis performed is aimed at understanding whether the message contains a potential threat: virus, malware, phishing, ransomware. If our antivirus detects a threat, the email is silently discarded because the sender of these emails is almost always non-existent, so sending a notification would not make sense.
### Antispam [#antispam]
The second scan is aimed at understanding whether the message can be considered unwanted (Spam or Bulk email) or whether it contains a potential threat not detected by the previous antivirus filter. Each email is assigned a score, which is the result of a series of evaluations and analyses performed by the system. This score is related to the email content and to the presence of the sender IP in various less relevant DNSBLs. Depending on the assigned score, the email may:
* be quarantined in the *Spam* folder of your email account
* be rejected with a *500 error* at SMTP dialogue level. The sender of the email will receive a non-delivery notification and can take the appropriate action.
### Analysis with Email log analysis [#analysis-with-email-log-analysis]
With Email log analysis, the real-time log analysis tool, you can independently check whether the antispam or antivirus filter blocked a message due to a false positive. For more information about searching with Email log analysis, please read the relevant [documentation](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/tracemail).
### Whitelist and Blacklist [#whitelist-and-blacklist]
A **Whitelist** is a list where you can add email addresses or domains that you consider safe and whose messages must not be blocked by the antispam filter, either inbound or outbound. A whitelist only acts at the antispam email content analysis level, so if an email comes from a blacklisted IP, from an incorrectly configured server, or contains a virus, it will still be rejected. You can add an email address or domain to the Whitelist directly from Webmail. For more information, please read the reference [documentation](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/webmail/mail/impostazioni-mail#eccezioni-antispam).
A **Blacklist** is a list where you can add email addresses or a domain from which you do not want to receive messages because you consider them spam or unwanted. Adding an email address or domain to the blacklist causes the message to be rejected to the sender with a 500 SMTP error. You can add an email address or domain to the Blacklist directly from Webmail. For more information, please read the reference [documentation](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/webmail/mail/impostazioni-mail#eccezioni-antispam).
The whitelists and blacklists you add are intended to temporarily resolve a problematic situation. Our system can learn, based on user reports, any false positive/negative issues and adapt its filters accordingly. Because of this, user customizations may be automatically removed after a few months.
The email addresses of email senders must be valid internet addresses because it is not possible to accept email from senders to whom a reply cannot be sent. For example, domains without correct DNS configuration or invalid or non-existent domains.
If the sender domain uses SPF or DKIM, the settings must be correct.
The DNSBL lists used may vary over time depending on technical factors. Any changes will, where possible and appropriate, be reported on these pages after they are applied. When our servers receive a connection from a blacklisted IP, they return a permanent 5.x.x error; the remote server will not retry the connection and will immediately generate a bounce (error message) addressed to the sender.
Except for antispam analysis, you cannot customize the filters described above because they are tied to common, sensible rules that all email server administrators must follow. In addition, since blocking occurs at IP/DNS level or during the early stages of the SMTP dialogue, the email addresses of blocked senders are not present in our system logs, only the IP addresses of the sending servers. In any case, after a block for one of the reasons listed above, an error message is always returned to the sending server or to the sender itself (i.e. the email address specified in the “Return-Path” header), so no email can be lost.
Our technical support is always available to assess false positive cases and find the solution best suited to your needs.
Learn more about [Whitelist and
Blacklist](https://www.qboxmail.it/blog/webmail-whitelist-blacklist/) on the
Qboxmail blog.
### Antispam on sent emails [#antispam-on-sent-emails]
For greater security, an antispam and antivirus system is also present on our SMTP servers, to prevent a compromised email account (for example after a password theft) from being used to send spam from our servers and damage the reputation of our IP addresses. Through Tracemail you can check whether an account or a message has been blocked for these reasons. This is how the error appears in Tracemail when there is an attempt to send a Spam email through our SMTP servers:
If Spam sending attempts are repeated over time, the email account will be prevented from sending further messages through an SMTP block. Your first task will be to scan the user’s PC to make sure there are no viruses or malware, and then change the password of the blocked account. Once these procedures have been completed, you can unblock SMTP by following the procedure described in the [documentation](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/caratteristiche/smtp-policy#sblocco-dell-smtp).
### Anomalous sending notification [#anomalous-sending-notification]
Qboxmail accounts are protected by a system that detects when an account performs anomalous email sending through our SMTP servers.
This usually happens after the login credentials for the email account have been stolen, with the aim of using that account to send spam or phishing emails. When this anomalous activity is detected, an email is sent to the mailbox under attack and to the owner of the Qboxmail account to which that mailbox is linked. In addition, as a precaution, the sending of further emails via SMTP is temporarily suspended.
Once the cause has been identified, including by analyzing sending logs through the Tracemail tool, and the problem has been resolved, including by using Antivirus on the user’s computer, a password change must be performed.
Once these procedures have been completed, you can unblock SMTP by following the procedure described in the [documentation](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/caratteristiche/smtp-policy#sblocco-dell-smtp).
Learn more about [Email
Security](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/email-security/) on the
Qboxmail website.
# Automatic email deletion (/en/guides/features/automatic-deletion)
### Spam [#spam]
Emails in the Spam folder are automatically deleted 30 days after they are received. To prevent important emails from being deleted, you need to periodically check the messages in the Spam folder and, if necessary, move them to other folders by marking them as *Not Spam*.
There are no time limits for storing messages in any folders other than Spam
and Trash.
Emails downloaded locally to your email client via POP3 are not included among
the emails deleted automatically. Only emails managed via IMAP and Webmail are
included in these automatic activities. Once messages have been deleted by the
account’s automatic cleanup system, they can no longer be recovered.
### Trash [#trash]
Emails moved to the Trash are automatically deleted 30 days after they are moved to the Trash.
There are no time limits for storing messages in any folders other than Spam
and Trash.
Emails downloaded locally to your email client via POP3 are not included among
the emails deleted automatically. Only emails managed via IMAP and Webmail are
included in these automatic activities. Once messages have been deleted by the
account’s automatic cleanup system, they can no longer be recovered.
### Duplicate emails [#duplicate-emails]
Qboxmail has implemented a feature that automatically removes duplicate incoming messages from your email account.
This feature is useful when your email account is also among the recipients of an Email Alias. In this case, an email sent both to the alias email address and to your own email address would result in the same message being received twice.
In this case, the first message is delivered to the user’s Inbox, while the second message is delivered directly to the Trash marked as read, and will be automatically deleted after 30 days.
# Centralized email signature management (/en/guides/features/centralized-signature-management)
Qboxmail lets you manage email account signatures not only from Webmail, but also centrally from the Control Panel.
Centralized signature management can be performed:
* at domain level from the Control Panel
* at email account level from the Control Panel
* at email account level from Webmail
### Domain Signatures from the Control Panel [#domain-signatures-from-the-control-panel]
From the Control Panel, you can add a domain-level signature and apply it to all primary email accounts on that domain in a single operation.
The signature you set will be inserted automatically in Qboxmail Webmail, but not in configured clients.
You can compose a signature using plain text or HTML text, and even use variables to dynamically build the signature template for all users.
You can set a domain-level signature only if the domain has a Professional or
Enterprise plan.
To add a domain-level signature, access the Control Panel:
* *Domains > domain name with Professional or Enterprise plan > Settings > Webmail > Centralized email signature*
Enter your company signature with plain text, the company logo, or paste the HTML of a previously created signature directly. You can add variables that will be automatically populated with the information entered in the domain profile and in each individual user's profile.
The variables you can use in the domain signature are:
| Variable | Description |
| ------------------------- | --------------- |
| `{{f_name}}` | First name |
| `{{l_name}}` | Last name |
| `{{company}}` | Company name |
| `{{email}}` | Email address |
| `{{role}}` | Role |
| `{{phone}}` | Company phone |
| `{{mobile}}` | Mobile |
| `{{email_secondary}}` | Secondary email |
| `{{country}}` | Country |
| `{{state}}` | State/Region |
| `{{city}}` | City |
| `{{zip}}` | ZIP/Postal code |
| `{{address}}` | Street address |
| `{{fax}}` | Fax |
| `{{organizational_unit}}` | Department |
The symbol indicates that some
users do not have the corresponding field set in their profile.
By clicking , you can see the list of email accounts that are missing the corresponding field in their profile. You can update the domain profile from the domain settings and user profiles from the settings of each individual email account. After updating the profiles, you can proceed by reloading the signature with variables.
After entering the signature, you can:
* Enable or disable automatic application of the signature to all new email accounts
and choose whether to:
* Apply the signature only to all accounts that do not have one yet
* Apply the signature to all accounts on the domain
Uploading a domain-level signature affects only primary email accounts and not
users' other alias identities.
### Email Account Signatures from the Control Panel [#email-account-signatures-from-the-control-panel]
From the Control Panel, you can add, edit, or delete the signatures associated with a user's identities, both for their primary mailbox and their aliases.
The signature you set will be inserted automatically in Qboxmail Webmail, but not in configured clients.
To use this feature, the domain must have a Professional or Enterprise plan.
By setting custom signatures for the different identities of the email account, they will be automatically added in Qboxmail Webmail at the bottom of all new messages.
Identities are generated automatically based on the email alias and domain
alias settings for the domain.
For each signature, you will find the display name, the identity the signature is associated with, and the actions that can be performed for each signature.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ---------------------------------------- | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | **Bcc** \| Bcc | Lets you quickly understand whether the *Add sender in Bcc* setting is active on the signature. |
| | Edit | Edit the signature settings. |
| | Delete | Delete the signature. |
To add a signature, click *New Signature*, select the identity you want to associate it with, enter the display name and the signature body > *Save*. In the signature body, you can also add HTML code, such as the company logo or a link to a website.
Among the settings associated with a signature, you can enable/disable:
* *Add sender in Bcc* automatically, especially useful when managing email for mailboxes that have active forwards or in the case of Email Aliases or Domain Aliases.
* *Do not add signature to replies*
If you added a domain-level signature from the Control Panel, the configured
signature will automatically be associated with the primary email account.
### Email Account Signatures from Webmail [#email-account-signatures-from-webmail]
From Qboxmail Webmail, each user can independently manage their signatures by setting a custom signature for the different identities of their email account.
Identities are generated automatically based on the email alias and domain
alias settings for your domain.
To manage a signature from Webmail, access Webmail:
* *Settings > Signatures*
For each signature, you will find the display name, the identity the signature is associated with, and the actions that can be performed for each signature.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ---------------------------------------- | ------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Default** | Default | Lets you quickly understand whether the *Set sender as default* setting is active on the signature. |
| **Bcc** | Bcc | Lets you quickly understand whether the *Add sender in Bcc* setting is active on the signature. |
| | Edit | Edit the signature settings. |
| | Delete | Delete the signature. |
To add a signature, click *New Signature*, select the identity you want to associate it with, enter the display name and the signature body > *Save*. In the signature body, you can also add HTML code, such as your company logo or a link to a website.
Among the settings associated with a signature, you can enable/disable:
* *Set sender as default*, if you have multiple identities;
* *Add sender in Bcc* automatically, especially useful when managing email for mailboxes that have active forwards or in the case of Email Aliases or Domain Aliases.
* *Do not add signature to replies*
If there is only one identity, the section will not be displayed and you will
only need to enter the display name and signature.
For more details about [centralized email signature
management](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/pannello-di-controllo/gestione-firme-email-centralizzata/),
visit the Qboxmail website.
# Customizations (/en/guides/features/customizations)
Qboxmail lets you customize the visual appearance of your interfaces, so you can show a custom logo to users who access the services, and customize the service access URL. The available types of customizations are listed below.
Related to visual appearance:
* Logo customizations
Related to service access addresses:
* Qboxmail Label
* White Label
* Web Label
* Private Label
### Logo Customizations [#logo-customizations]
From the Control Panel, you can add a customization, even for an individual domain, that will be displayed in the Control Panel, Webmail, and Mail Time Machine when the user signs in to the services.
This type of customization can be enabled independently from the Control Panel and can be combined with the other types of customizations related to service access addresses. For more details, see the Control Panel documentation about [Customizations](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations/).
Logo customization **is included** in the service fee.
Logo customization by domain is available only in the Professional and
Enterprise plans.
## Qboxmail Label [#qboxmail-label]
With this customization, you choose to show the Qboxmail logo to users who access our services.
To sign in, you can use the following Qboxmail URLs:
* Webmail [https://webmail.qboxmail.com](https://webmail.qboxmail.com)
* Panel [https://panel.qboxmail.com](https://panel.qboxmail.com)
* Archive [https://vault.qboxmail.com](https://vault.qboxmail.com)
* Mail Time Machine [https://mtm.qboxmail.com](https://mtm.qboxmail.com)
Qboxmail Label is compatible with [logo customization](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations/), so if you add a logo for a domain, the Qboxmail logo will not appear for that domain; only the logo you added will be shown.
Qboxmail Label **is included** in the service fee.
### White Label [#white-label]
With White Label customization, any direct reference to Qboxmail is removed.
White Label access parameters are available for Resellers, with access URLs for Webmail, Panel, Archive, and Mail Time Machine. You can download the PDF file with the [White Label Parameters](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) for accessing the services from the Download section of the Customer Area after signing in.
With the White Label option, URLs cannot be customized with your company name.
White Label customization is compatible with [logo customization](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations/), so if you add a logo for a domain, the generic logo will not appear for that domain; the logo you added will be shown instead.
White Label **is included** in the service fee.
### Web Label [#web-label]
The Web Label option lets you customize the access URLs for the following modules with the desired domain name: Webmail, Control Panel, Archive, and Mail Time Machine.
You can enable the Web Label option on one or more domains, so your company or one of your customers can have their own custom URL for accessing Qboxmail services.
With the Web Label option, a valid SSL certificate for the specified domain is added to the Qboxmail platform, making access to the services recognizable and secure.
Web Label customization is compatible with [logo customization](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations/), so if you add a logo for a domain, the Qboxmail logo will not appear for that domain; only the logo you added will be shown.
You can download the PDF file with the configuration details for the [Web Label](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) option from the *Download* section of the Customer Area after signing in.
Web Label customization can be purchased for the following modules:
* 1st module: Webmail
* Additional modules: Panel, Archive, Mail Time Machine
Web Label is an option **not included** in the service fee. If you are interested, contact us for more information.
#### Web Label – Webmail [#web-label--webmail]
The first module purchased when enabling Web Label is the Webmail customization module. It lets you access Webmail with a URL customized with the requested domain name (for example, your company name), without any direct reference to Qboxmail.
With **Web Label - Webmail customization**, you can have:
* a custom URL for accessing Webmail with an SSL certificate
You can enable Web Label - Webmail on all domains managed by Qboxmail.
#### Web Label – Control Panel [#web-label--control-panel]
Among the additional modules that can be purchased together with the Webmail module, we offer the Web Label – Control Panel module. Web Label – Control Panel customization lets users access the Control Panel using a custom domain, for example with your company name.
With **Web Label – Control Panel customization**, you can have:
* a custom URL for accessing the Control Panel with an SSL certificate
You can enable Web Label – Control Panel on all domains managed by Qboxmail.
#### Web Label – Mail Time Machine [#web-label--mail-time-machine]
Among the additional modules that can be purchased together with the Webmail module, we offer the Web Label – Mail Time Machine module. Web Label – Mail Time Machine customization lets users access Mail Time Machine using a custom domain, for example with your company name.
With **Web Label – Mail Time Machine customization**, you can have:
* a custom URL for accessing Mail Time Machine with an SSL certificate
You can enable Web Label – Mail Time Machine on all domains managed by Qboxmail.
#### Web Label – Archive [#web-label--archive]
Among the additional modules that can be purchased together with the Webmail module, we offer the Web Label – Archive module. Web Label – Archive customization lets users access the Archive using a custom domain, for example with your company name.
With **Web Label – Archive customization**, you can have:
* a custom URL for accessing the Archive with an SSL certificate
You can enable Web Label – Archive on all domains managed by Qboxmail.
### Private Label [#private-label]
The Private Label option lets your users set custom access parameters for POP, IMAP, SMTP, DAV, Webmail, Control Panel, Archive, and Mail Time Machine services with your own domain name, so that the SSL certificate is valid for that domain. The customization also includes the MX and SPF records to set in the DNS of your customers' domains.
With **Private Label customization**, you can have:
* Custom domain with SSL certificate for accessing POP, IMAP, SMTP, and DAV services;
* Custom URL for accessing Webmail with an SSL certificate;
* Custom URL for accessing the Control Panel with an SSL certificate;
* Custom URL for accessing the Archive with an SSL certificate;
* Custom URL for accessing Mail Time Machine with an SSL certificate;
* MX and SPF records to set for your customers' domains.
Private Label customization is compatible with [logo customization](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations/), so if you add a logo for a domain, the generic logo will not appear for that domain; the logo you added will be shown instead.
Private Label is a project-based option and **is not included** in the service fee.
You can download the PDF file with the configuration details for the [Private Label](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/dl.php?type=d\&id=14) option from the *Download* section of the Customer Area after signing in.
All activation requests must first be approved by our sales department. If you are interested, contact us for more information.
Learn more about [white label
customization](https://www.qboxmail.com/white-label-email-hosting/) on the Qboxmail website.
# Email account storage (/en/guides/features/email-account-storage)
### Available Storage [#available-storage]
All email accounts have a default storage space of **8GB**, which can be increased up to **100GB**.
The available storage space (also called quota) applies to each individual email account and cannot be shared or split with other email accounts on the domain.
Example: a domain with 10 email accounts of 8GB each will have 80 GB of total available storage, but it cannot have a single 80GB mailbox.
If you need email accounts larger than 8 GB, you can set the size to **25 GB** and, if needed, increase the account size in 25 GB packages up to a **maximum of 100 GB** per email account.
From the Control Panel you can create email accounts with a size different from the default ones. Currently, the quotas that can be set are:
* 1GB
* 2GB
* 3GB
* 4GB
* 5GB
* 6GB
* 7GB
* 8GB
* 16GB
* 25GB
* 50 GB available for Professional and Enterprise plans
* 100 GB available for Enterprise plans
For billing purposes, only 8 GB, 25 GB, 50 GB, and 100 GB email accounts are
counted.
When creating a domain or in its settings, you can specify the default size (*Default Quota*) and maximum size (*Max Email Quota*) that email accounts associated with that domain will have, so as to limit the options available to the Postmaster user.
The storage used by email mailboxes can be checked in real time by the user through Webmail, the Control Panel, or their email client configured with IMAP (if it supports quota display, such as Thunderbird). The customer or the domain Postmaster can check the quota of all users from the Control Panel or via the APIs.
Email accounts also have a limit on the maximum number of email messages they
can contain.
The message count limit is only a protection system against possible abuse and normally no user reaches it. The maximum number of messages for each size is shown below:
| Mailbox Size | Max. number of messages | Mailbox Size | Max. number of messages |
| ------------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------ | ----------------------- |
| **0,50 GB** (Postmaster) | 1.600 messages | **7 GB** | 229.376 messages |
| **1 GB** | 32.768 messages | **8 GB** | 229.376 messages |
| **2 GB** | 65.536 messages | **16 GB** | 524.288 messages |
| **3 GB** | 98.304 messages | **25 GB** | 524.288 messages |
| **4 GB** | 131.072 messages | **50 GB** | 786.432 messages |
| **5 GB** | 163.840 messages | **100 GB** | 786.432 messages |
| **6 GB** | 196.608 messages | | |
The number of messages contained in an email mailbox is visible from Webmail in the "Used space" bar or via API.
### Email mailbox almost full warning (Quota Warning) [#email-mailbox-almost-full-warning-quota-warning]
Qboxmail notifies users by email when they are approaching 100% of used storage. Specifically, email warnings are sent when 80%, 90%, and 95% of used storage are exceeded, and when the mailbox returns below 85% or 75% of occupied storage.
When 100% of the available storage is reached, it is no longer possible to receive new email messages and access to the email mailbox may also experience problems. Email mailboxes that reach 100% of their quota must be expanded or email messages inside them must be deleted.
Through the Activity Log you can view the almost-full email mailbox warnings
sent to users and administrators
### Webhook or Email notification for almost-full email mailbox [#webhook-or-email-notification-for-almost-full-email-mailbox]
Qboxmail can also notify the customer when a user's email mailbox is almost full or when it returns below a certain threshold.
You can enable these notifications by accessing the Control Panel as Admin, clicking your name in the top right, and then going to **Settings -> Notifications**.
From here you can choose to receive an alert via Webhook or by email notification, at an address of your choice, for all mailboxes under your management.
Webhook or Email notifications are sent:
* when 95% of the quota is exceeded
* when 90% of the quota is exceeded
* when 80% of the quota is exceeded
* when the quota returns below 85%
* when the quota returns below 75%
To enable [Webhook or Email notifications](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/panel-settings#notifications), please read the related Control Panel or [API](/en/api/putApiUsersMeNotifications) documentation.
### Postmaster email mailbox quota [#postmaster-email-mailbox-quota]
The “*postmaster\@domain*” user mailbox, being a service account, has a non-editable 50MB quota.
### Maximum message and attachment size [#maximum-message-and-attachment-size]
The maximum size of an email message that can be received on the Qboxmail platform is 50MB.
# Features (/en/guides/features)
In this section you can find the parameters and guides useful for configuring access to Qboxmail services.
# Metadata retention policy (/en/guides/features/metadata-retention)
### Managing log visibility [#managing-log-visibility]
Following current Italian regulations on the retention of business email metadata, you can configure how long mailbox logs remain visible directly from the Control Panel.
### Configuring log visibility [#configuring-log-visibility]
You can choose between two options:
* 21 days
* 30 days
### How to configure log duration [#how-to-configure-log-duration]
#### For existing domains [#for-existing-domains]
The default setting remains **30 days**. If you want to apply the **21-day** limit to one or more domains, you can do so by changing the domain settings in the Control Panel: *Domains → Security → TraceMail log visibility*
To make a bulk change across all your domains, contact our support team.
#### For new domains [#for-new-domains]
New domains will automatically follow the setting configured by your Administrator account *→ Administration → Settings -> General -> TraceMail log visibility for new domains* (**21** or **30 days**, depending on what you have set).
During domain creation, this setting will not be visible, but it can be changed later.
# Plus Addressing (/en/guides/features/plus-addressing)
### Plus Addressing [#plus-addressing]
Plus addressing lets you create variations of your primary email address by adding a “+” followed by a keyword. Messages sent to these variations are delivered to the same mailbox.
#### How it works [#how-it-works]
If your address is [nome.cognome@domain.com](mailto:nome.cognome@domain.com), you can use variations such as:
* `nome.cognome+newsletter@domain.com`
* `nome.cognome+supplier@domain.com`
You do not need to create aliases or new accounts. All messages arrive in the primary mailbox.
You can use plus addressing to:
* Separate sign-ups, newsletters, or contact forms from general communications
* Identify where an address was registered
* Create automatic filters to route incoming emails to dedicated folders
#### Rules in Webmail [#rules-in-webmail]
* Log in to Webmail
* **Settings → Rules**
* Create a new rule: condition “Recipient contains” and enter the keyword after the “+”
* Select the “Move to folder” action and choose the destination folder
* Save the rules
Using unique labels helps you understand whether a service has shared or sold
your email address. If you start receiving messages sent to an address with a
“+label” from senders not connected to the original service, the contact was
probably shared. At that point, you can create a rule that automatically blocks
or moves those messages, without changing your primary address.
Learn more about [Plus
Addressing](https://www.qboxmail.it/blog/plus-addressing-lo-sapevi-che/) on
the Qboxmail blog.
# POP, IMAP and SMTP Limits (/en/guides/features/pop-imap-smtp-limits)
### Session limits [#session-limits]
Each email account is subject to a maximum limit on the POP and IMAP connections it can open to Qboxmail servers from the same IP address.
The enforced values are more than sufficient for normal use by a user through their email client:
* 50 concurrent sessions for IMAP
* 10 concurrent sessions for POP
This limit may be reached if you configure the same email account on too many workstations and at the same time on several devices such as smartphones, when all these accounts are connected through the same company connection. In this case, the problem appears as a warning about an incorrect username and password. You can reset the number of active connections simply by closing and reopening your email client. If this procedure does not work, there may be other issues to resolve on your PC, for example an antivirus or firewall that does not correctly close sessions even after you have closed the email client, or that blocks TLS connections. Usually, the antivirus vendor’s website provides instructions on how to resolve the issue.
To make sure that the incorrect username/password problem is caused by reaching the maximum number of connections, you can analyze the email account logs using [Email log analysis](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/tracemail) in the Control Panel.
To avoid this type of problem, we recommend configuring your email account on only one PC and, if it is also configured on smartphones and tablets, accessing it through your mobile connection and not through Wi-Fi or ADSL. We also recommend assigning each person a single personal email account ([es.mario.rossi@dominio.it](mailto:es.mario.rossi@dominio.it)) and setting generic email accounts (info@, sales@, …) as Email Aliases to the individual personal email accounts.
For more information about [Email Aliases](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/email-alias), please read the related documentation.
### Thunderbird [#thunderbird]
If you use Thunderbird, you can change the number of connections opened for each account in its settings: *Settings > Server Settings > Advanced > Maximum number of server connections to cache* (set it to 1)
More tips on how to configure Thunderbird can be found in this article on our blog:
[https://www.qboxmail.it/blog/impostazioni-imap-consigliate-per-thunderbird/](https://www.qboxmail.it/2013/02/12/impostazioni-imap-consigliate-per-thunderbird/)
### MS Outlook [#ms-outlook]
If you use MS Outlook, you cannot change the number of connections opened to the IMAP server. In this case, we recommend unsubscribing from the IMAP folders you do not use frequently and setting the new message check frequency to between 15 and 25 minutes (this does not affect new message notifications, which remain real-time). The error disappears immediately when you close the email client, because the connections are also closed immediately on the server side.
If the error persists, contact our technical support by opening a Ticket so that we can perform more in-depth analysis.
# SMTP Policies (/en/guides/features/smtp-policies)
Qboxmail ensures a high level of deliverability for emails sent from its SMTP servers. To maintain a high service guarantee, we have implemented security measures on our SMTP servers against password theft (Account Takeover Protection), fair use policies, and sending limits.
### Account Takeover Protection [#account-takeover-protection]
Account Takeover is a type of attack in which criminals manage to steal a victim’s identity by stealing their login credentials.
Qboxmail includes an Account Takeover Protection system. The protection consists of several layers of analysis and procedures. Access to email accounts is constantly monitored and, if anomalous due to time or origin, may trigger an alert.
When suspicious activity is detected, it is automatically reported both to the user and to their administrator, and the anomalous activity is immediately blocked.
From the Control Panel, you can analyze these suspicious activities using Tracemail, and you can apply additional security measures such as two-factor authentication, blocking the reuse of old passwords, or restricting access to email accounts only from trusted IP addresses or corporate VPNs.
### Fair use policies for SMTP services [#fair-use-policies-for-smtp-services]
Below are some of the permitted and prohibited activities that customers and users must comply with.
* sending personal emails from the user’s email clients is allowed (Outlook, Thunderbird, iPhone, Webmail, or other email clients)
* sending transactional emails from your billing/e-commerce systems is allowed
* sending newsletters/email marketing is not allowed
* the sender email address (`From` field) must match the domain of the authentication username, or an alias domain associated with the real domain. It is therefore possible to send email messages only with a sender domain that is active on Qboxmail and that you manage
* any other type of abuse, considered as such because it may affect the operation of other users, results in temporary blocking of the SMTP service
### Sending limits from Qboxmail SMTP servers [#sending-limits-from-qboxmail-smtp-servers]
The Authenticated SMTP provided with the email hosting service must be used in compliance with the following limits:
* the maximum size of messages you can send is 50MB
* the maximum number of recipients for each single send is 150
* the maximum sending rate is 5 messages per second (300 per minute)
* the maximum number of authentications that can be performed within 30 minutes is 300
* the maximum number of different IP addresses from which you can perform authentications within 30 minutes is 5
* messages must have a sender that is an active domain on Qboxmail
Each active email account on Qboxmail includes a maximum number of emails that can be sent, up to **250 messages in 24h**.
Each single send corresponds to one recipient email address and is counted as
such within the limit of 250 messages in 24h. For example, if you send a single
communication to 10 addresses, the system will record 10 sends.
When this threshold is exceeded, SMTP returns the error “*Quota exceeded (number of mails in total)*”.
After the daily sending limit for an email account is exceeded, the system sends an email notification to the user and to the mailbox owner, specifying that the limit has been exceeded.
Messages sent within the same domain are accepted even after the threshold is reached.
### Daily sending limits [#daily-sending-limits]
If you need to send more than the included 250 messages per day, you can exceed the daily sending limit for an individual email account.
You can increase the daily sending limits directly from the Control Panel by selecting *Domain > Email Account > General > Sending Limits* and choosing the desired option. The various limits are divided as shown in the following table:
| Sends in 24h per mailbox | Basic | Professional | Enterprise |
| ------------------------ | -------- | ------------ | ---------- |
| 250 | included | included | included |
| 1,000 | paid | included | included |
| 2,000 | paid | paid | paid |
| 5,000 | paid | paid | paid |
You can find all service prices on the pricing page in the Control Panel.
If you need a higher number of sends, we invite you to consider the [Email Delivery](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/email-delivery/features/introduction) service.
The amount will be automatically included in the next invoice.
If you use the annual billing plan, the invoice for the SMTP service will also be annual and will coincide with the service expiration date.
Please remember that all emails sent from our SMTP servers are automatically signed with DKIM. For more information about [DKIM signing](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/panel/other/dkim), see the related documentation.
### Anti-spam and anti-abuse policies [#anti-spam-and-anti-abuse-policies]
The policies and limits on our SMTP servers are necessary to prevent possible blacklist listings or penalties, to avoid any maximum email sends by “botnets” that may have fraudulently obtained a user’s password, or to prevent possible abuse by users of the service themselves.
Violation of the policies results in the account being blocked at SMTP level if anomalous activity is detected in the connection to the server or in email sending. Anomalous activity means a high number of SMTP authentications within a few minutes, simultaneous authentications from multiple distinct IP addresses, or sending messages containing Spam/Phishing. When SMTP is blocked, all other features, including reading emails, remain active.
The block has been designed not to be triggered during normal email sending activity through standard email reading and sending tools (MS Outlook, Thunderbird, iPhone, Webmail, or other email clients). The block may instead be triggered if the account is used in automated email sending systems (such as Sendblaster or other mass Newsletter sending software) or if mass emails are sent from your email client or from webmail.
### SMTP unblocking [#smtp-unblocking]
You can independently unblock an account that has gone into “[SMTP block](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/panel/management/email-accounts#email-account-settings)” from the Control Panel by going to *Domains > Domain Name > Blocked Email Account > Settings > General > Services > re-enable the SMTP connection access checkbox > Save*.
Before unblocking, we recommend that you first scan the user’s PC to make sure there are no viruses or malware, and then change the password of the blocked account. For greater security, you can enable additional measures such as IP address restrictions or two-factor authentication.
If, after unblocking, new abuse by the same user occurs again, the account will be blocked by our operators and will remain blocked until we have received your confirmation that the abuse has stopped, together with confirmation that the issue causing the sending of spam/phishing emails has been resolved (usually a PC infected by a virus that steals the email account password).
#### Monitoring and tracking email messages with Tracemail [#monitoring-and-tracking-email-messages-with-tracemail]
Using the *Tracemail > Sent Mail* tool, available in the Control Panel, you can view details of the emails sent by the email accounts of a specific domain. This can help diagnose the causes of the block.
#### Spam from a compromised SMTP account analyzed by Tracemail [#spam-from-a-compromised-smtp-account-analyzed-by-tracemail]
The SMTP service analyzes outgoing emails to detect the presence of viruses or spam. If these messages contain material that is harmful to recipient users or to the reputation of Qboxmail servers, sending is not allowed.
### Sending limits during the Free Trial period [#sending-limits-during-the-free-trial-period]
During the free trial period, the number of messages you can send is reduced to 25 per email account within 24 hours in order to prevent abuse. When you exceed this limit, the SMTP server returns the error “Quota exceeded (number of mails in total)” during sending. The counter is automatically reset 24 hours after the first send. The limit is removed once you complete an order from the Control Panel.
# Checking the settings (/en/guides/whmcs/check-settings)
## 7.1 [#71]
To check whether the installation was successful and whether the choices made when creating products and their configurable options are in line with your sales strategy, you should place an order by simulating the experience your customers will have.
Log in from the client area and place an order. If everything went as expected, you are ready to start expanding your offer with Qboxmail services!
### Place a test order [#place-a-test-order]
### Check the DNS record [#check-the-dns-record]
### Create a test email mailbox [#create-a-test-email-mailbox]
### Create a test email alias [#create-a-test-email-alias]
Remember that the Qboxmail module for WHMCS is free and tested on WHMCS version 8.6. In case of technical issues or suggestions, please open a ticket from your Qboxmail client area available at [qboxmail.it/manager](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/) .
# WHMCS Configuration (/en/guides/whmcs/configuration)
## 4.1 Generating the API token in the Control Panel [#41-generating-the-api-token-in-the-control-panel]
For the next step, you need to generate a Qboxmail API token.
Log in to the Qboxmail [Control Panel](https://panel.qboxmail.com). Click the avatar in the top right and select “**Settings**”. Scroll to the bottom of the settings page to find “**API Access**”. Copy the token by clicking the “**Copy**” button.
## 4.2 Adding a new server in WHMCS [#42-adding-a-new-server-in-whmcs]
Go back to the WHMCS page.
From the selection menu in the top right, click the setup button and select System Setting. On the System Setting page, select “**Servers**” and click “**Add new server**”.
## 4.3 Server details [#43-server-details]
On the “Servers” page, go to the “**Module**” section and select "**Qboxmail**".
For “**Hostname**”, enter **panel.emailpnl.com**. Leave the “Username” and “Password” fields empty.
In the “**Access Hash**” window, paste the API token generated in the Qboxmail Control Panel and click the “**Test Connection**” button.
## 4.4 Server name [#44-server-name]
Once the connection to the Server has been confirmed, you will land on the settings page where you must choose and enter a name for the newly connected server. In this example, the name “Qboxmail” was chosen. Once the operation is complete, click the “**Save Changes**” button at the bottom of the page.
## 4.5 Creating a server group [#45-creating-a-server-group]
After connecting the Qboxmail server, you need to create a new server group and assign it to the Qboxmail server you just connected.
Click setup > System Setting > Servers > **+Create a new group**. You can choose any name for the server group; in the example, the name “Qboxmail – Group” was chosen.
**IMPORTANT:** Once you have chosen the name, you must select the server created in step **4.3** and move it to the right-hand column using the “**Add**” button. Save the changes by clicking "**Save Changes**".
# Creating a Qboxmail account (/en/guides/whmcs/create-account)
Before installing the WHMCS module, you need an active Qboxmail account.
The full activation flow is documented in [Email Hosting > Activation](/en/guides/email-hosting/activation).
After activation, continue with the WHMCS module installation:
# Creating and configuring products (/en/guides/whmcs/create-configure-products)
In this section, you must save the changes made using the “**save
changes**” button after each change.
## 6.1 Create the product group [#61-create-the-product-group]
Before creating products, you need to create a **product group** that includes all Qboxmail services.
From the selection menu at the top right, click the setup button and select System Setting. On the System Setting page, select “**Products/Services**”.
Click “**Create new group**” and fill in “**Product Group Name**” with the name you prefer to identify this product group (for example Email Accounts Premium). You can provide more information about the product group by filling in the “Product Group Headline” and “Product Group Tagline” fields.
## 6.2 Create the first product [#62-create-the-first-product]
After creating the Product Group, you are ready to **create your first product**.
Click setup > System Setting > **Products/Services** > click “**Create a New Product**”
Fill in the following fields as indicated:
* Product Type: Other
* Product Group: The name of the group created in step **6.1**
* Product Name: Choose the name you want to give your product
* Module: Qboxmail
* Create as Hidden: Select On. You should hide the product until its setup has been completed. **Remember to select Off once the product is ready to be published** (go to: “system setting” > “Products/Services” > edit, on the row of the product created > “details” > check the “Hidden” box).
Click “**Continue**”.
### 6.2.1 [#621]
On the product settings page, *as the first operation*, go to the “**Module Settings**” tab:
* For “**Module Name**”, select “Qboxmail”.
* For “**Server Group**”, select the server group created in step **4.5**.
Moving to the bottom of the page, choose *when* the product purchased by the customer should be activated by WHMCS in the Qboxmail Control Panel. We recommend selecting one of the following options based on your needs:
* “**Automatically setup the product as soon as the first payment is received**” if you want to create and activate the product automatically once the first payment is received from that customer, without having to manually confirm the order.
* “**Automatically setup the product when you manually accept a pending order**” if you want to manually check the order and payment before manually confirming the order and therefore activating the product.
* “**Automatically setup the product as soon as an order is placed**” if you want the product to be activated immediately after the order is placed, even without receiving payment.
* “**Do not automatically setup this product**” if you want the product not to be activated until the order is manually accepted. In this case, remember to select “**Run Module Create**” by accessing the order details; otherwise, the module will not create the mailboxes in the Qboxmail Control Panel.
Now return to “**Product Setting**”. The available options refer to the 3 different plans into which the Qboxmail service is divided. You must therefore choose which of the 3 plans (Basic, Professional, Enterprise) will regulate your product.
In the example, a product regulated by the “Professional” plan was chosen.
After choosing the plan, click “**Create Configurable Options**”.
Here you can choose the configurable options linked to the product in question. **The configurable options refer to the mailbox sizes that can be activated through Qboxmail services.**
It is important to choose\*\* the options compatible\*\* with the selected plan, as
follows
* If the product is regulated by the “**Basic**” plan, select the “**Email Accounts 8GB**”; “**Email Accounts 25GB**” options.
* If the product is regulated by the “**Professional**” plan, select the “**Email Accounts 8GB**”; “**Email Accounts 25GB**”; “**Email Accounts 50GB**” options.
* If the product is regulated by the “**Enterprise**” plan, select **all** available options.
In the example, a product in the “Professional” plan was chosen:
When you click "Confirm", you are automatically redirected to the "**Configurable Options**" tab. Verify that the row for the Product created in step 6.2 is selected, then click "**Save Changes**".
### 6.2.2 [#622]
Now move to the “**Details**” tab, where you need to check the “**Require Domain**” option:
Continue creating the product by entering a **description** that highlights the benefits the user would get from choosing this product.
### 6.2.3 [#623]
Move to the “**Pricing**” tab, where you can choose the billing cycle linked to the product that best suits your sales strategy.
Under “**Payment Type**”, select “**Recurring**” and choose your preferred billing cycle. You can select different billing cycles for the same product if necessary; this choice also depends on your sales strategies. To enable different billing cycles for the same product, you must click “**Enable**” for each billing cycle you want to accept.
At this stage, you do not need to specify the product price because all services provided by Qboxmail are configurable. The price will be entered later, when choosing the configurable options. Check “**No**” for “**Allow Multiple Quantities**”.
The rest of the options can be adjusted according to your sales strategy.
## 6.3 Configurable options [#63-configurable-options]
Click Setup > System Settings > **Configurable Options**
On this page, you can configure products according to the Qboxmail service plan variables described in step **6.2.3**.
Click the “**Edit**” button to edit the *configurable option* of the desired product.
For each product, you can adjust the available configurable options, which depend on the plan that regulates the product. Let’s take as an example a product regulated by the “Enterprise” plan. You will therefore be able to adjust all possible options, because the “Enterprise” plan allows you to activate mailboxes of all sizes available in the Qboxmail service.
Once you have chosen the product whose *configurable options* you want to edit, proceed to configuring the options.
Click the “**Edit**” button for the option you want to configure.
The configurations concern:
* The minimum number of mailboxes that can be ordered for a given product (depends on your sales strategies);
* The price of mailboxes for different billing cycles (depends on your sales strategies).
For “**Option Type**”, choose “**Quantity**”.
Set the prices for each billing cycle chosen in step **6.2.2**.
Set a minimum orderable quantity. The choice depends on your sales strategies.
## 6.4 Show the product [#64-show-the-product]
Once all configurable options have been set and the product is ready to be shown to customers, return to the “**Products/Services**” section and edit the product in question by unchecking "hidden".
# Setting up the domain registrar (/en/guides/whmcs/domain-registrar-settings)
### 3.1 [#31]
From the selection menu at the top right, click the setup button and select
System Setting > **Active your first domain registrar**
from the drop-down menu on the right (if you have already set up a Domain Registrar, go to step 3.3).
### 3.2 [#32]
Choose the “**Email Notification**” module, configure it with the email address where you want to receive WHMCS notifications, then click "**Save Changes**" to save.
### 3.3 [#33]
If not already set up, enter an accepted payment method using the “**Activate Your First Payment Gateway**” option (if you have already set up a Payment Gateway, go to step 4.1).
# Module Transfer via FTP (/en/guides/whmcs/ftp-module-transfer)
### 2.1 [#21]
Unzip the **Qboxmail\_WHMCS\_v2.x.y.zip** file and, using your FTP client, transfer the Qboxmail folder (you can find it
inside **/modules/servers/Qboxmail/**) to your WHMCS server by following the path **\[WHMCS\_installdir] /modules/servers/**.
From here:
**Local package**
↓
Upload the entire `Qboxmail` folder to:
**Remote server**
# Import orders from the panel (/en/guides/whmcs/import-orders)
You can add a domain previously created through the panel by adding a new order in WHMCS:
From the customer profile, open the **Domains** tab and click **Add New
Order**.
Enter the domain name and select the appropriate **Product/Service** option.
Enable the
**Domain Checked**
option.
Fill in the
**Postmaster password**
field.
Fill in the **Domain ID** field. You can find the domain identifier in the
Qboxmail panel: `Panel → Domains → [Domain Name] → Code`
Set the order status to
**Active**
and save the changes.
Alternatively, uncheck "Run Module Create" before accepting the order. This way, the module will not try to recreate the domain on the panel.
# WHMCS Module (/en/guides/whmcs)
In this section, you can find the parameters and guides useful for configuring access to Qboxmail and WHMCS services.
## Module installation [#module-installation]
Before installing the WHMCS module, make sure your Qboxmail service is active. If you still need to activate it, follow [Email Hosting > Activation](/en/guides/email-hosting/activation).
## Module configuration [#module-configuration]
# Introduction to the WHMCS module (/en/guides/whmcs/introduction)
The Qboxmail module for WHMCS allows you to sell Qboxmail email accounts to your customers directly from your WHMCS installation.
This makes it easier for your customers to pair a Professional Cloud Email service with their domain or web space.
To get started, you need to download the latest version of the **Qboxmail\_WHMCS\_v2.x.y.zip** file, available at the following address:
[https://www.qboxmail.it/download/WHMCS/Qboxmail\_WHMCS\_latest.zip](https://www.qboxmail.it/download/WHMCS/Qboxmail_WHMCS_latest.zip)
In the folder you will find the **WHMCS module for Qboxmail**, which you will need during the procedure described below, and the **module installation guide
in PDF format** (in both Italian and English).
The Qboxmail module for WHMCS is free and tested from WHMCS version 8.11 up to 9.0 and PHP 7.4-8.3. In case of technical issues or suggestions, we invite you to open a ticket from your Qboxmail customer area available at [qboxmail.it/manager](https://www.qboxmail.it/manager/).
### Qboxmail module features [#qboxmail-module-features]
With the Qboxmail module for WHMCS you can:
* Allow your customers to purchase premium email from your WHMCS
* Add, remove, enable, or disable email accounts
* Update passwords
* Manage quota
* Add and remove aliases
* Access Webmail or the email Control Panel
* Create different products as “email packages” across the three different plans of our service
* Customize the Webmail and email Control Panel URL with your **Private Label** domain
* **NEW** Support for the Email Archive service
* **NEW** Sending limits per email account with dedicated billing
* **NEW** Automatic provisioning of Qboxmail when a web hosting service is ordered
* **NEW** Detection of existing Qboxmail domains not present in WHMCS and import for billing
* **NEW** Dashboard with statistics, server status with connection tests, and more
* **NEW** Improved support for the Lagom theme
Discover the [Qboxmail module for
WHMCS](https://www.qboxmail.it/modulo-whmcs/) and its features on the
Qboxmail website.
# Defining the sales strategy (/en/guides/whmcs/sales-strategy)
### 5.1 [#51]
Before creating products, you should define the strategy you prefer for offering Qboxmail services. Having a sales strategy is a fundamental step that will help you set up products more clearly and answer many of the questions in the next steps.
Answer these questions before creating products:
1. Do you plan to offer the service with a minimum purchase or entirely as Pay-per-use?
2. Do you prefer monthly or annual billing?
3. Do you want to offer products based on all our service plans or only some of them (for more details: [qboxmail.it/prezzi](https://www.qboxmail.it/prezzi/)).
There are many offer combinations you can create. For example, you could create:
* mailbox packages with *minimum purchasable quantities* of uniform sizes with annual billing (example: 5 mailboxes of 8GB in the “Professional” plan),
* or packages with *minimum purchasable quantities* and mailboxes of different sizes (example: 5 mailboxes of 8GB + 3 mailboxes of 25GB + 1 mailbox of 50GB + 1 mailbox of 100GB in the “Enterprise” plan),
* or perhaps you prefer a pay-per-use model to give your customers more flexibility.
Whatever your preferred sales strategy, taking some time to define it before the next step will help you create a clear offer and save time later.
# Update procedure (/en/guides/whmcs/update-procedure)
This page describes the procedure to follow to update the Qboxmail WHMCS module to the latest version, safely replacing the version already installed.
```
# Backup everything first
# backup data
cp -a modules/servers/Qboxmail modules/servers/Qboxmail.backup
# backup database
mysqldump -u user -p whmcs > whmcs-backup.sql
# Remove old version
cd modules/servers/
rm -rf Qboxmail/
# Upload new version to modules/servers/Qboxmail/
# and from v2.3.0
# Upload new addon in
# modules/addons/qboxmail_tools/
# Fix permissions if necessary (change www-data with your web server user:group)
chown -R www-data:www-data modules/servers/Qboxmail/ modules/addons/qboxmail_tools/
chmod -R 755 modules/servers/Qboxmail/ modules/addons/qboxmail_tools/
# Clear WHMCS template caches
rm -rf templates_c/*
# Activate the module from Admin → System Settings → Addon Modules → Qboxmail
# After activation setup Addons → Qboxmail for bundle config and domain import
# If upgrading from 2.2.0: delete old configurable option group first, then regenerate to get the new options (archive + sending capacity)
# 1. Go to **System Settings → Products/Services → Products/Services**
# 2. Edit your Qboxmail product
# 3. Go to **Module Settings** tab
# 4. Scroll to **Configurable Options** section
# 5. Click **Create Configurable Options**
# This creates quantity-based options. Set pricing per unit in **System Settings → Configurable Options**.
# Test the connection
# Admin: System → Servers → Test Connection
# Client: Access product details page
```
# Create domain and email aliases (/en/api/examples/create-domain-and-email-aliases)
This example uses the **Management API** to add aliases to an existing active Hosting domain.
## Workflow and API calls [#workflow-and-api-calls]
| Step | API call | What happens |
| ---- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1 | `POST /api/domains/:code/aliases` | Create a domain alias for the active domain. |
| 2 | Manual DNS change | Publish the ownership DNS record for the alias domain. |
| 3 | `PUT /api/domains/:code/aliases/:alias_domain_code/dns_ownership_check` | Verify alias-domain ownership. |
| 4 | `GET /api/domains/:code/aliases/:alias_domain_code` | Poll until the alias domain is active. |
| 5 | `POST /api/domains/:code/alias_email_accounts` | Create an email alias that forwards to one or more destinations. |
| 6 | `GET /api/domains/:code/alias_email_accounts/:alias_email_account_code` | Poll until the email alias is active. |
## Before you start [#before-you-start]
* Use a production Management API token in the `X-Api-Token` header.
* The main domain must already be active.
* You need access to the alias domain DNS zone.
* Email alias destinations should be real addresses that can receive mail.
## Full TypeScript example [#full-typescript-example]
```ts
import { stdin as input, stdout as output } from "node:process";
import { createInterface } from "node:readline/promises";
type Json = Record;
type CreatedResource = {
message: string;
resource_code: string;
};
type ResourcesResponse = {
resources: T[];
};
type StatusResource = {
status: string;
status_detail: string;
};
type DomainAlias = StatusResource & {
code: string;
name: string;
ownership_verification_random_code?: string;
possession_a_record?: string;
};
type EmailAlias = StatusResource & {
code: string;
email_address: string;
destinations: string[];
};
const API_BASE = (process.env.QBOXMAIL_API_BASE ?? "https://api.qboxmail.com/api").replace(/\/$/, "");
const API_TOKEN = requiredEnv("QBOXMAIL_API_TOKEN");
const DOMAIN_CODE = requiredEnv("DOMAIN_CODE");
const ALIAS_DOMAIN_NAME = requiredEnv("ALIAS_DOMAIN_NAME");
const ALIAS_EMAIL_NAME = process.env.ALIAS_EMAIL_NAME ?? "info";
const ALIAS_DESTINATIONS = requiredEnv("ALIAS_DESTINATIONS").split(",").map((value) => value.trim());
function requiredEnv(name: string): string {
const value = process.env[name];
if (!value) throw new Error(`Missing env var: ${name}`);
return value;
}
function sleep(ms: number) {
return new Promise((resolve) => setTimeout(resolve, ms));
}
async function api(path: string, options: { method?: string; body?: Json } = {}): Promise {
const method = options.method ?? "GET";
const response = await fetch(`${API_BASE}${path}`, {
method,
headers: {
Accept: "application/json",
"Content-Type": "application/json",
"X-Api-Token": API_TOKEN,
},
body: options.body === undefined ? undefined : JSON.stringify(options.body),
});
if (response.status === 204) return undefined as T;
const payload = await response.json();
if (!response.ok) {
throw new Error(`${method} ${path} failed: ${response.status} ${JSON.stringify(payload)}`);
}
return payload as T;
}
function firstResource(response: ResourcesResponse): T {
const resource = response.resources[0];
if (!resource) throw new Error("API returned no resources");
return resource;
}
async function waitFor(label: string, load: () => Promise) {
const deadline = Date.now() + 30 * 60_000;
while (Date.now() < deadline) {
const resource = await load();
if (resource.status === "enabled" && resource.status_detail === "ok") return resource;
console.log(`${label} not ready yet: ${resource.status}/${resource.status_detail}`);
await sleep(15_000);
}
throw new Error(`Timed out waiting for ${label}`);
}
async function waitForEnter(message: string) {
const rl = createInterface({ input, output });
await rl.question(message);
rl.close();
}
async function createDomainAlias(): Promise {
const created = await api(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(DOMAIN_CODE)}/aliases`, {
method: "POST",
body: { name: ALIAS_DOMAIN_NAME },
});
console.log(`Domain alias created: ${ALIAS_DOMAIN_NAME} (${created.resource_code})`);
return created.resource_code;
}
async function getDomainAlias(aliasDomainCode: string): Promise {
return firstResource(
await api>(
`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(DOMAIN_CODE)}/aliases/${encodeURIComponent(aliasDomainCode)}`,
),
);
}
async function verifyDomainAlias(aliasDomainCode: string): Promise {
await api(
`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(DOMAIN_CODE)}/aliases/${encodeURIComponent(aliasDomainCode)}/dns_ownership_check`,
{ method: "PUT" },
);
}
async function createEmailAlias(): Promise {
const created = await api(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(DOMAIN_CODE)}/alias_email_accounts`, {
method: "POST",
body: {
name: ALIAS_EMAIL_NAME,
destinations: ALIAS_DESTINATIONS,
},
});
console.log(`Email alias created: ${created.resource_code}`);
return created.resource_code;
}
async function getEmailAlias(aliasEmailCode: string): Promise {
return firstResource(
await api>(
`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(DOMAIN_CODE)}/alias_email_accounts/${encodeURIComponent(aliasEmailCode)}`,
),
);
}
async function main() {
const aliasDomainCode = await createDomainAlias();
const aliasDomain = await getDomainAlias(aliasDomainCode);
console.log("Publish the DNS ownership record requested by Qboxmail before continuing.");
console.log({
aliasDomain: aliasDomain.name,
ownershipCode: aliasDomain.ownership_verification_random_code,
expectedARecord: aliasDomain.possession_a_record,
});
await waitForEnter("Press Enter after the DNS ownership record resolves...");
await verifyDomainAlias(aliasDomainCode);
await waitFor("domain alias activation", () => getDomainAlias(aliasDomainCode));
const aliasEmailCode = await createEmailAlias();
const emailAlias = await waitFor("email alias activation", () => getEmailAlias(aliasEmailCode));
console.log({
aliasDomainCode,
aliasEmailCode,
emailAddress: emailAlias.email_address,
destinations: emailAlias.destinations,
});
}
main().catch((error) => {
console.error(error);
process.exit(1);
});
```
## Run it [#run-it]
Save the code above as `create-domain-and-email-aliases.ts`, then run:
```sh
export QBOXMAIL_API_TOKEN=""
export DOMAIN_CODE="D123456789"
export ALIAS_DOMAIN_NAME="example.net"
export ALIAS_EMAIL_NAME="info"
export ALIAS_DESTINATIONS="user@example.com,external@example.net"
npx tsx create-domain-and-email-aliases.ts
```
# Create a domain and mailbox (/en/api/examples/create-domain-and-mailbox)
This production example uses the **Management API** to create a Hosting domain, verify domain ownership with DNS, wait for activation, create the first mailbox, and update its quota.
## Workflow and API calls [#workflow-and-api-calls]
| Step | API call | What happens |
| ---- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| 1 | `POST /api/domains` | Create the Hosting domain and postmaster account. |
| 2 | `GET /api/domains/:code` | Read the domain status and DNS ownership data. |
| 3 | Manual DNS change | Publish the ownership DNS record in the domain DNS zone. |
| 4 | `PUT /api/domains/:code/dns_ownership_check` | Ask Qboxmail to verify DNS ownership and queue activation. |
| 5 | `GET /api/domains/:code` | Poll until the domain is `enabled` with `status_detail: ok`. |
| 6 | `POST /api/domains/:code/email_accounts` | Create the first mailbox on the active domain. |
| 7 | `GET /api/domains/:code/email_accounts/:email_account_code` | Poll until the mailbox is active. |
| 8 | `PUT /api/domains/:code/email_accounts/:email_account_code` | Optionally update mailbox settings, such as quota. |
## Before you start [#before-you-start]
* Use a production Management API token in the `X-Api-Token` header.
* Make sure the customer can create paid Hosting resources. If required, complete the initial order in the Qboxmail panel before provisioning by API.
* Have access to the domain DNS zone. Production uses real DNS ownership verification; do not use the sandbox-only skip ownership endpoint.
* If your token belongs to an admin, set `CUSTOMER_CODE`. If it belongs directly to the customer, leave it empty.
This example creates real production resources. Use a test domain first, then run the same workflow for customer domains when your integration is ready.
## Full TypeScript example [#full-typescript-example]
```ts
import { stdin as input, stdout as output } from "node:process";
import { createInterface } from "node:readline/promises";
type Json = Record;
type CreatedResource = {
message: string;
resource_code: string;
};
type ResourcesResponse = {
resources: T[];
pagination?: Record;
};
type StatusResource = {
status: string;
status_detail: string;
};
type Domain = StatusResource & {
code: string;
name: string;
customer_code?: string;
ownership_verification_random_code?: string;
possession_a_record?: string;
};
type EmailAccount = StatusResource & {
code: string;
name: string;
email_address: string;
max_email_quota: number;
};
const API_BASE = (process.env.QBOXMAIL_API_BASE ?? "https://api.qboxmail.com/api").replace(/\/$/, "");
const API_TOKEN = requiredEnv("QBOXMAIL_API_TOKEN");
const DOMAIN_NAME = requiredEnv("DOMAIN_NAME");
const POSTMASTER_PASSWORD = requiredEnv("POSTMASTER_PASSWORD");
const MAILBOX_PASSWORD = requiredEnv("MAILBOX_PASSWORD");
const CUSTOMER_CODE = process.env.CUSTOMER_CODE;
const DOMAIN_PLAN = process.env.DOMAIN_PLAN ?? "basic";
const MAILBOX_NAME = process.env.MAILBOX_NAME ?? "hello";
const UPDATED_MAILBOX_QUOTA_BYTES = Number(process.env.UPDATED_MAILBOX_QUOTA_BYTES ?? 2_147_483_648);
function requiredEnv(name: string): string {
const value = process.env[name];
if (!value) throw new Error(`Missing env var: ${name}`);
return value;
}
function sleep(ms: number) {
return new Promise((resolve) => setTimeout(resolve, ms));
}
function parseBody(text: string): unknown {
try {
return JSON.parse(text);
} catch {
return text;
}
}
async function api(path: string, options: { method?: string; body?: Json } = {}): Promise {
const method = options.method ?? "GET";
const response = await fetch(`${API_BASE}${path}`, {
method,
headers: {
Accept: "application/json",
"Content-Type": "application/json",
"X-Api-Token": API_TOKEN,
},
body: options.body === undefined ? undefined : JSON.stringify(options.body),
});
if (response.status === 204) return undefined as T;
const text = await response.text();
const payload = text ? parseBody(text) : undefined;
if (!response.ok) {
throw new Error(`${method} ${path} failed: ${response.status} ${JSON.stringify(payload)}`);
}
return payload as T;
}
function firstResource(response: ResourcesResponse): T {
const resource = response.resources[0];
if (!resource) throw new Error("API returned no resources");
return resource;
}
async function waitFor(label: string, load: () => Promise, ready: (resource: T) => boolean) {
const deadline = Date.now() + 30 * 60_000;
while (Date.now() < deadline) {
const resource = await load();
if (ready(resource)) return resource;
console.log(`${label} not ready yet: ${resource.status}/${resource.status_detail}`);
await sleep(15_000);
}
throw new Error(`Timed out waiting for ${label}`);
}
async function waitForEnter(message: string) {
const rl = createInterface({ input, output });
await rl.question(message);
rl.close();
}
async function createDomain(): Promise {
const created = await api("/domains", {
method: "POST",
body: {
name: DOMAIN_NAME,
plan: DOMAIN_PLAN,
...(CUSTOMER_CODE ? { customer_code: CUSTOMER_CODE } : {}),
postmaster_password: POSTMASTER_PASSWORD,
postmaster_password_confirmation: POSTMASTER_PASSWORD,
},
});
console.log(`Domain created: ${DOMAIN_NAME} (${created.resource_code})`);
return created.resource_code;
}
async function getDomain(domainCode: string): Promise {
return firstResource(await api>(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(domainCode)}`));
}
async function waitForDnsOwnershipData(domainCode: string): Promise {
return waitFor("DNS ownership data", () => getDomain(domainCode), (domain) => Boolean(domain.possession_a_record));
}
async function verifyDomainOwnership(domainCode: string): Promise {
await api(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(domainCode)}/dns_ownership_check`, { method: "PUT" });
console.log("DNS ownership check queued. Waiting for domain activation.");
}
async function waitForDomainReady(domainCode: string): Promise {
return waitFor(
"domain activation",
() => getDomain(domainCode),
(domain) => domain.status === "enabled" && domain.status_detail === "ok",
);
}
async function createFirstEmailAccount(domainCode: string): Promise {
const created = await api(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(domainCode)}/email_accounts`, {
method: "POST",
body: {
name: MAILBOX_NAME,
firstname: "Example",
lastname: "User",
password: MAILBOX_PASSWORD,
password_confirmation: MAILBOX_PASSWORD,
},
});
console.log(`Mailbox creation queued: ${MAILBOX_NAME}@${DOMAIN_NAME} (${created.resource_code})`);
return created.resource_code;
}
async function getEmailAccount(domainCode: string, emailCode: string): Promise {
return firstResource(
await api>(
`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(domainCode)}/email_accounts/${encodeURIComponent(emailCode)}`,
),
);
}
async function waitForEmailAccountReady(domainCode: string, emailCode: string): Promise {
return waitFor(
"mailbox activation",
() => getEmailAccount(domainCode, emailCode),
(email) => email.status === "enabled" && email.status_detail === "ok",
);
}
async function updateEmailAccountQuota(domainCode: string, emailCode: string, quotaBytes: number): Promise {
await api(`/domains/${encodeURIComponent(domainCode)}/email_accounts/${encodeURIComponent(emailCode)}`, {
method: "PUT",
body: { max_email_quota: quotaBytes },
});
console.log(`Mailbox quota update queued: ${quotaBytes} bytes`);
}
async function waitForEmailAccountQuotaUpdate(
domainCode: string,
emailCode: string,
quotaBytes: number,
): Promise {
return waitFor(
"mailbox quota update",
() => getEmailAccount(domainCode, emailCode),
(email) =>
email.status === "enabled" && email.status_detail === "ok" && email.max_email_quota === quotaBytes,
);
}
async function main() {
const domainCode = await createDomain();
const domainForDns = await waitForDnsOwnershipData(domainCode);
console.log("Publish the DNS ownership record requested by Qboxmail before continuing.");
console.log({
domain: domainForDns.name,
ownershipCode: domainForDns.ownership_verification_random_code,
expectedARecord: domainForDns.possession_a_record,
});
await waitForEnter("Press Enter after the DNS ownership record resolves...");
await verifyDomainOwnership(domainCode);
const domain = await waitForDomainReady(domainCode);
const emailCode = await createFirstEmailAccount(domain.code);
const email = await waitForEmailAccountReady(domain.code, emailCode);
await updateEmailAccountQuota(domain.code, email.code, UPDATED_MAILBOX_QUOTA_BYTES);
const updatedEmail = await waitForEmailAccountQuotaUpdate(domain.code, email.code, UPDATED_MAILBOX_QUOTA_BYTES);
console.log({
domainCode: domain.code,
emailCode: updatedEmail.code,
emailAddress: updatedEmail.email_address,
quotaBytes: updatedEmail.max_email_quota,
});
}
main().catch((error) => {
console.error(error);
process.exit(1);
});
```
## Run it [#run-it]
Save the code above as `create-domain-and-mailbox.ts`, then run:
```sh
export QBOXMAIL_API_TOKEN=""
export DOMAIN_NAME="example.com"
export POSTMASTER_PASSWORD=""
export MAILBOX_PASSWORD=""
# Optional
export CUSTOMER_CODE=""
export DOMAIN_PLAN="basic"
export MAILBOX_NAME="hello"
export UPDATED_MAILBOX_QUOTA_BYTES="2147483648"
npx tsx create-domain-and-mailbox.ts
```
The script pauses after domain creation so you can publish the DNS ownership record. After the DNS record resolves, press Enter. The script then continues with ownership verification, activation polling, mailbox creation, and quota update.
# API Examples (/en/api/examples)
Use these examples when you need a full flow, not just one endpoint.
Each example starts with the production workflow and API calls, then shows a complete TypeScript script you can adapt.
# Send a transactional email (/en/api/examples/send-transactional-email)
This example uses the **Send API** to send one transactional email from an existing Delivery account.
## Workflow and API calls [#workflow-and-api-calls]
| Step | API call | What happens |
| ---- | ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1 | Panel setup | Create or choose a Delivery account and Send API token. |
| 2 | DNS setup | Make sure the sending domain is assigned and verified for the Delivery account. |
| 3 | `POST /v1/send` | Queue one message for delivery. |
| 4 | Response handling | Store `request_id` and `message_id` for logs and troubleshooting. |
## Before you start [#before-you-start]
* Use a Send API token in the `Authorization: Bearer ` header.
* Do not use a Management API token for `/v1/send`.
* The sender domain must already be configured on the Delivery account.
## Full TypeScript example [#full-typescript-example]
```ts
type SendResponse = {
error_code: number;
message: string;
request_id: string;
queued_messages: number;
messages: Array<{
error_code: number;
message: string;
request_id: string;
message_id: string;
submitted_at: string;
to: string;
}>;
};
const SEND_API_BASE = (process.env.QBOXMAIL_SEND_API_BASE ?? "https://api.qboxmail.com/v1").replace(/\/$/, "");
const SEND_API_TOKEN = requiredEnv("QBOXMAIL_SEND_API_TOKEN");
const FROM_EMAIL = requiredEnv("FROM_EMAIL");
const TO_EMAIL = requiredEnv("TO_EMAIL");
function requiredEnv(name: string): string {
const value = process.env[name];
if (!value) throw new Error(`Missing env var: ${name}`);
return value;
}
async function sendTransactionalEmail(): Promise {
const response = await fetch(`${SEND_API_BASE}/send`, {
method: "POST",
headers: {
Authorization: `Bearer ${SEND_API_TOKEN}`,
"Content-Type": "application/json",
},
body: JSON.stringify({
messages: [
{
from: FROM_EMAIL,
to: [TO_EMAIL],
subject: "Your test email",
text_body: "Hello from Qboxmail Delivery.",
html_body: "Hello from Qboxmail Delivery.
",
},
],
}),
});
const payload = (await response.json()) as SendResponse | { message?: string; request_id?: string };
if (!response.ok) {
throw new Error(`Send failed: ${response.status} ${JSON.stringify(payload)}`);
}
return payload as SendResponse;
}
sendTransactionalEmail()
.then((result) => {
console.log({
requestId: result.request_id,
queuedMessages: result.queued_messages,
messageIds: result.messages.map((message) => message.message_id),
});
})
.catch((error) => {
console.error(error);
process.exit(1);
});
```
## Run it [#run-it]
Save the code above as `send-transactional-email.ts`, then run:
```sh
export QBOXMAIL_SEND_API_TOKEN=""
export FROM_EMAIL="sender@example.com"
export TO_EMAIL="recipient@example.net"
npx tsx send-transactional-email.ts
```
Keep the returned `request_id` and `message_id`. They are the fastest way to troubleshoot the message later.
# Send API (/en/api/send-api)
# Send API [#send-api]
Use the Send API to queue email delivery requests over HTTP.
Before using these endpoints, create a Delivery account, configure at least one sending domain, and create a Send API token from that Delivery account. The Send API only submits messages; it does not create or configure Delivery resources.
* [Send messages](/en/api/send-api/send): queue one or more complete messages.
* [Send bulk messages](/en/api/send-api/send-bulk): queue one templated message for multiple recipients.
# Send bulk messages (/en/api/send-api/send-bulk)
This endpoint requires an existing Delivery account, a configured sending domain, and a Send API bearer token created for that Delivery account.
Bulk messages use Handlebars-style template variables, written as `{{variable_name}}`, inside the base `message` fields such as `subject`, `text_body`, `html_body`, headers, metadata, tags, and attachment filenames or content IDs. For each item in `recipients`, the API renders a dedicated message using that recipient's `substitutions` object. The special `{{email}}` variable is always available and contains the recipient email address. By default, every recipient must provide all variables used by the template; set `options.strict_substitutions` to `false` if missing variables should render as empty values instead.
# Send messages (/en/api/send-api/send)
This endpoint requires an existing Delivery account, a configured sending domain, and a Send API bearer token created for that Delivery account.
# Authentication (/en/api/concepts/authentication)
| API | Header | Token belongs to | Use it for |
| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------- | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------ |
| **Management API** | `X-Api-Token: ` | A Qboxmail user | Managing Hosting and Delivery resources |
| **Send API** | `Authorization: Bearer ` | A Delivery account | Sending email with `/v1/send` or `/v1/send/bulk` |
Before using production data, you can request access to the Qboxmail sandbox environment. Sandbox Management API calls use the `https://sandbox.qboxmail.com` host and do not affect production resources.
## Management API authentication [#management-api-authentication]
Use `X-Api-Token` when calling Management API endpoints under `/api/*`.
```bash
curl "https://api.qboxmail.com/api/domains" \
-H "X-Api-Token: "
```
Your token decides what you can see and change. Customers, managers, team members, email accounts, and postmasters may have different permissions and access to different resources.
Team members must have the required API permissions for the operation they call.
## Send API authentication [#send-api-authentication]
Use a bearer token when calling Send API endpoints under `/v1/*`.
A Send API bearer token is created for a specific Delivery account. If you do not have a Delivery account and a configured sending domain yet, set those up first with the Management API or from the panel.
```bash
curl -X POST "https://api.qboxmail.com/v1/send" \
-H "Authorization: Bearer " \
-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
-d '{
"messages": [
{
"from": "sender@example.com",
"to": ["john@example.com"],
"subject": "Hello",
"text_body": "Hello from Qboxmail Delivery"
}
]
}'
```
A Send API token is tied to one Delivery account. The account controls the sending plan, quotas, domain assignments, and suppression-list behavior. The Send API uses that account; it does not create it.
## Create a Send API token from the panel [#create-a-send-api-token-from-the-panel]
For now, create Send API tokens from the Qboxmail panel.
1. Open the **Qboxmail panel**.
2. Go to **Delivery** or **Email Delivery**.
3. Open **Accounts**.
4. Select the Delivery account that will send messages.
5. Open the **API tokens** section.
6. Create a new token and give it a clear label, such as `Production app` or `CRM integration`.
7. Copy the full token immediately.
8. Optional: restrict the token to trusted IP addresses or CIDR ranges.
The full Send API token is shown only when it is created. Later, the panel shows only a masked preview. If you lose the token, revoke it and create a new one.
## IP allow-lists [#ip-allow-lists]
Send API tokens can be restricted by IP address. Delivery accounts can also have their own IP allow-list. Both checks apply.
* If no restriction is configured, the token can be used from any IP.
* If a token allow-list is configured, requests must come from one of those IPs or CIDR ranges.
* If the Delivery account has an allow-list, requests must also match the account policy.
## Token security [#token-security]
* Store tokens in a secret manager, not in source code.
* Use a separate Send API token per application or environment.
* Restrict Send API tokens by IP when possible.
* Rotate tokens when people leave a project or an integration is retired.
* Revoke unused tokens.
# Choose the right API (/en/api/concepts/choose-api)
Qboxmail has two APIs. They work together, but serve different purposes.
The Send API only works after you have a Delivery account set up. Before using it, make sure the account has at least one configured sending domain and a Send API token. If you still need to create those, use the Management API or the Qboxmail panel first.
| API | What it is for | Typical endpoints | Authentication |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| **Management API** | Create, configure, and inspect Hosting and Delivery resources. | `/api/domains`, `/api/delivery/domains`, `/api/delivery/accounts`, `/api/delivery/suppression_lists`, `/api/delivery/tracemail/*` | `X-Api-Token` |
| **Send API** | Send transactional or newsletter email from an existing Delivery account. | `/v1/send`, `/v1/send/bulk` | `Authorization: Bearer ` |
## When to use the Management API [#when-to-use-the-management-api]
* Create or manage Hosting domains.
* Create mailboxes, aliases, domain aliases, signatures, address books, and contacts.
* Manage managers, team members, imports, migrations, and Vault archiving.
* Create Delivery domains and Delivery accounts.
* Manage Delivery suppression lists.
* Read Delivery TraceMail logs, counters, dashboard data, and reports.
## When to use the Send API [#when-to-use-the-send-api]
Use the Send API only after you have a Delivery account, a configured sending domain, and a Send API token.
* Send one transactional message from an existing Delivery account.
* Send a batch of complete messages from an existing Delivery account.
* Send a templated newsletter or campaign to many recipients from an existing Delivery account.
* Send email over HTTP instead of SMTP, after Delivery is set up.
## Common decision table [#common-decision-table]
| I want to... | Use |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- |
| Add a new hosted email domain | Management API |
| Create a mailbox for a hosted domain | Management API |
| Create a Delivery domain for outbound sending | Management API |
| Verify Delivery DNS records | Management API |
| Create a Delivery account | Management API |
| Create a Send API token for that Delivery account | Qboxmail panel, from the Delivery account settings |
| Send an email but I do not have a Delivery account yet | Set up Delivery first |
| Send an email but the Delivery domain is not configured yet | Set up Delivery first |
| Send a transactional email from an already configured Delivery account | Send API |
| Send one templated message to many recipients from an already configured Delivery account | Send API |
| Add an address to the suppression list | Management API |
| Check message status and delivery results | Management API TraceMail |
A Management API token is not valid for `/v1/send`. A Send API bearer token is not valid for `/api/*` management endpoints.
# Common workflows (/en/api/concepts/common-workflows)
## Set up hosted email [#set-up-hosted-email]
Use the **Management API**.
1. Create a Hosting domain.
2. Complete ownership and DNS checks.
3. Create mailboxes and aliases.
4. Configure signatures, address books, forwarding, limits, and related settings.
5. Use Email log analysis to troubleshoot access, incoming mail, or outgoing mail.
You do not need the Send API for normal hosted mailbox setup.
In production, if the customer does not have a billing profile yet, complete the first order in the Qboxmail panel before creating paid Hosting resources via API. Active Hosting trial customers and Free Hosting customers can create Hosting resources via API without a billing profile.
## Set up transactional sending [#set-up-transactional-sending]
Use the **Management API**, the **panel**, then the **Send API**.
Do not call `/v1/send` until you have a Delivery account, a configured sending domain, and a Send API token.
If this is the customer's first paid setup, complete the first order in the Qboxmail panel before creating the Delivery account via API. The active Hosting trial exception does not apply to Delivery accounts.
1. Create a Delivery domain.
2. Publish and verify DNS records.
3. Create a Delivery account with type `transactional`.
4. Assign the verified domain to the account.
5. Create a Send API token from the Delivery account settings in the panel.
6. Store the token securely.
7. Call `/v1/send` from your application.
8. Monitor events in Delivery TraceMail.
## Set up newsletter sending [#set-up-newsletter-sending]
Use the same setup as transactional sending, but create or choose a Delivery account with type `newsletter`.
Then call `/v1/send/bulk` for templated recipient-based sends. Like `/v1/send`, it assumes the Delivery account and sending domain are already configured.
Best practices:
* Keep recipient data clean before sending.
* Use strict substitutions during testing.
* Add campaign IDs in metadata or headers when useful for your own tracking.
* Monitor bounces, complaints, and suppression-list behavior.
## Manage a suppression list [#manage-a-suppression-list]
Use the **Management API**.
1. List current suppression-list entries.
2. Add addresses that must not receive email.
3. Import or export suppression-list data when needed.
4. Use Send API `suppression_summary` to see the pre-check result for a send request.
5. Use TraceMail for the final delivery result.
Delivery suppression lists affect Send API delivery. You manage them with the Management API because they are Delivery resources.
## Troubleshoot a sent message [#troubleshoot-a-sent-message]
1. Confirm the message was sent through an already configured Delivery account.
2. Confirm the Send API request returned `202 Accepted`.
3. Save the `request_id` and `message_id` from the response.
4. Search Delivery TraceMail using the account, domain, date, recipient, or message details available in your application.
5. Check whether the recipient was suppressed, bounced, rejected, delayed, or delivered.
6. If no final event appears, check account status, quota, and sending domain configuration.
## Migrate mailboxes [#migrate-mailboxes]
Use the **Management API**.
1. Upload or create the migration/import resource.
2. Validate resources.
3. Start or schedule the migration.
4. Read migration runs, resource logs, and stats.
5. Use Vault import endpoints when moving archived mailbox data.
The Send API is not involved in mailbox migration.
# Set up Delivery before sending (/en/api/concepts/delivery-setup)
Before an application can send through the Send API, it needs a configured Delivery account and at least one valid sending domain. Set this up with the Management API and the Qboxmail panel; then use the Send API to send email.
## Setup flow [#setup-flow]
### Create or choose a Delivery domain [#create-or-choose-a-delivery-domain]
Create a Delivery domain with the Management API or from the panel. This is the domain you want to use as a sender domain.
### Publish and verify DNS records [#publish-and-verify-dns-records]
The Delivery domain shows the DNS records required for verification and authentication. Publish them in the domain DNS zone, then run the verification endpoint or verify from the panel.
Do not start production sending before DNS verification is complete.
### Create a Delivery account [#create-a-delivery-account]
Create a Delivery account for the sending use case.
When using an API token in production, the customer must already have a billing profile. If this is the first paid setup, log into the Qboxmail panel and complete the first order before creating Delivery accounts via API. Hosting trial exceptions do not apply to Delivery. Sandbox Delivery setup does not require a production billing profile.
Delivery accounts are usually one of these types:
* `transactional`: application emails such as password resets, receipts, notifications, and product events.
* `newsletter`: bulk or campaign-style messages.
Assign one or more verified Delivery domains to the account.
### Create a Send API token in the panel [#create-a-send-api-token-in-the-panel]
Open the Qboxmail panel and go to the selected Delivery account.
From the **API tokens** section, create a token and copy the full token immediately. Use a clear label so you can recognize the token later.
Optional: restrict the token to one or more trusted IP addresses or CIDR ranges.
### Send a test message [#send-a-test-message]
Call `/v1/send` with the Send API bearer token.
### Monitor delivery [#monitor-delivery]
Use Management API Delivery TraceMail endpoints, dashboard counters, and suppression-list tools to monitor what happened after the message was queued.
## Send API token creation from the panel [#send-api-token-creation-from-the-panel]
For now, create Send API tokens from the panel:
1. Open **Qboxmail panel**.
2. Go to **Delivery** or **Email Delivery**.
3. Open **Accounts**.
4. Select the Delivery account.
5. Open **API tokens**.
6. Click **Create token** or **New token**.
7. Set a label.
8. Copy the token immediately.
9. Save it in your secret manager.
After creation, the panel only shows a masked token preview. If you lose the token, revoke it and create a new one.
## First send request [#first-send-request]
```bash
curl -X POST "https://api.qboxmail.com/v1/send" \
-H "Authorization: Bearer " \
-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
-d '{
"messages": [
{
"from": "sender@example.com",
"to": ["recipient@example.net"],
"subject": "Delivery test",
"text_body": "This message was sent through the Qboxmail Send API."
}
]
}'
```
A successful request returns `202 Accepted`. That means the message was accepted for delivery. It does not mean the message reached the recipient inbox yet.
## Before production [#before-production]
* The Delivery domain is verified.
* The sender address uses an assigned Delivery domain.
* The Delivery account is enabled.
* The account type matches the use case: transactional or newsletter.
* The Send API token is stored securely.
* IP allow-lists include the application servers.
* Bounce notifications and suppression-list policy are configured.
* Monitoring uses `request_id`, `message_id`, and TraceMail.
# Errors and retries (/en/api/concepts/errors-retries)
Handle API errors based on the status code, error body, and whether it is safe to try again.
## Management API validation errors [#management-api-validation-errors]
Management API validation errors usually look like this:
```json
{
"message": "Validation failed",
"errors": [
{
"field": "name",
"description": "already exists"
}
]
}
```
Common statuses:
| Status | Meaning | Retry? |
| ------ | ------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `401` | Missing or invalid authentication. | No. Fix the token. |
| `403` | Authenticated, but not allowed. | No. Fix permissions, resource ownership, account status, billing profile, or plan state. |
| `404` | Resource not found or not visible to the current user. | No, unless the resource may be created later. |
| `422` | Validation failed. | No. Fix request fields. |
| `500` | Server error. | Maybe. Retry with backoff if the operation is safe to repeat. |
### Billing profile required [#billing-profile-required]
For production Management API provisioning, `403 Forbidden` can mean the customer has no billing profile yet. In that case, log into the Qboxmail panel and complete the first order before retrying paid provisioning. This does not apply to sandbox, and active Hosting trial or Free Hosting customers can manage Hosting resources without a billing profile.
## Send API errors [#send-api-errors]
Send API errors use a stable JSON format:
```json
{
"error_code": 400,
"message": "Request body must include a non-empty `messages` array.",
"error": "missing_send_payload",
"request_id": "f43eb659-beb4-4f8a-a737-2d403998f4cf"
}
```
Always log `request_id`. It lets you correlate client logs, API logs, TraceMail events, and support investigations.
If a Send API call fails because of authentication, permissions, quota, or domain settings, check the Delivery setup first: account, sending domain, token, IP allow-list, and account status.
## Send API status guide [#send-api-status-guide]
| Status | Examples | Retry? |
| ------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `400` | Invalid JSON, missing payload, invalid message fields, missing bulk substitutions. | No. Fix payload. |
| `401` | Missing or invalid bearer token. | No. Create or fix the Send API token for the Delivery account. |
| `403` | IP not allowed, account disabled, plan not started or expired. | No. Fix Delivery account, token, domain, or IP configuration. |
| `413` | Payload larger than allowed. | No. Split the request or reduce attachments. |
| `429` | Request rate limit or quota exceeded. | Yes, only after `Retry-After` or with backoff when appropriate. |
| `502` | Queue or downstream delivery service unavailable. | Yes, with exponential backoff. |
| `503` | Temporary reservation conflict or unavailable service. | Yes, with exponential backoff. |
| `504` | Downstream timeout. | Maybe. Retry carefully and reconcile duplicates. |
## Retry strategy [#retry-strategy]
Recommended client behavior:
1. Do not retry `400`, `401`, `403`, `404`, or `422` without changing the request.
2. For `429`, respect the `Retry-After` header when present.
3. For `502`, `503`, and `504`, retry with exponential backoff and jitter.
4. Cap retries. Do not retry forever.
5. Store your own correlation data in application logs so you can reconcile ambiguous outcomes.
If the client loses the connection before receiving a response, the message may or may not have been queued. Avoid blind retries for large or important sends unless your application can tolerate duplicates or reconcile them later.
## Good logging fields [#good-logging-fields]
For Management API requests, log:
* endpoint and method;
* authenticated integration/user;
* resource code or ID;
* response status;
* validation errors.
For Send API requests, log:
* `request_id`;
* each returned `message_id`;
* recipient count;
* suppression summary;
* response status and `error` code when present.
# API Concepts (/en/api/concepts)
Qboxmail has two APIs: the **Management API** creates and manages Hosting and Delivery resources, while the **Send API** sends transactional and newsletter email from an existing Delivery account.
Use the **Management API** to create and configure resources, including Delivery domains and Delivery accounts. Use the **Send API** only when the Delivery account is ready and you want to send email.
# Limits, quotas, and suppression (/en/api/concepts/limits-quotas-suppression)
Limits protect the platform and keep sending predictable. Some limits are technical, while others come from the Delivery account plan and configuration.
The Send API always runs through an existing Delivery account. The account defines the token, sending domains, quotas, and suppression-list settings used by `/v1/send` and `/v1/send/bulk`.
## Send API technical limits [#send-api-technical-limits]
| Limit | Value |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- |
| `/v1/send` batch size | Up to `500` messages per request |
| `/v1/send/bulk` recipients | Up to `500` recipients per request |
| HTTP payload size | Up to `50mb` |
| Send request rate | `10` requests per second per Send API token |
If you exceed the request rate, the Send API returns `429` and may include `Retry-After`.
## Delivery account quotas [#delivery-account-quotas]
A Send API token belongs to a Delivery account. That account controls sending limits such as plan capacity, period limits, overdelivery behavior, account status, and assigned domains.
When a send request arrives, the API reserves quota before it queues messages. If quota is not available, the request is rejected before messages are accepted.
Common quota-related errors use `429`, for example daily, monthly, yearly, or overquota limits.
## Suppression list behavior [#suppression-list-behavior]
The suppression list prevents sending to recipients that should not receive email, such as addresses with previous bounces or complaints.
For Send API requests:
1. The API performs a suppression pre-check.
2. The pre-check estimates how many recipients should reserve quota.
3. The response includes `suppression_summary`.
4. Final suppression checks happen later during delivery.
`suppression_summary` describes the API check before messages are queued. It is useful for visibility and quota estimates, but it is not the final delivery result.
## Suppression summary statuses [#suppression-summary-statuses]
| Status | Meaning |
| ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `checked` | The pre-check completed successfully. |
| `ignored` | Suppression was ignored because of account or request configuration. |
| `unavailable` | The pre-check could not be completed; the API proceeds conservatively. |
| `not_applicable` | There were no recipients to check. This is unusual for valid send requests. |
Example:
```json
{
"suppression_summary": {
"status": "checked",
"checked_recipients": 2,
"accepted_recipients": 1,
"suppressed_recipients": 1,
"suppressed_emails": ["jane@example.com"]
}
}
```
## Manage suppression lists [#manage-suppression-lists]
Use the Management API to:
* list suppression-list entries;
* add an email address;
* update reason, account scope, or active status;
* delete an entry;
* import or export suppression-list data.
Use the Send API response and Delivery TraceMail to understand how suppression affected a specific send.
# Logs and troubleshooting (/en/api/concepts/logs-troubleshooting)
* For resource setup problems, inspect the Management API resource status and validation errors.
* For email sent from an existing Delivery account, use Send API IDs with Delivery TraceMail.
* For hosted mailbox traffic, use Email log analysis.
## IDs to keep [#ids-to-keep]
When using the Send API, first make sure the message was sent with a token from the correct Delivery account. Then always store:
| Field | Why it matters |
| ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `request_id` | Correlates one API request across logs and support investigations. |
| `message_id` | Identifies the queued message and helps trace delivery events. |
| recipient email | Helps search TraceMail and suppression-list results. |
| your own order/user/campaign ID | Helps reconcile API events with your application. |
## Delivery TraceMail [#delivery-tracemail]
Use Delivery TraceMail endpoints in the Management API to inspect Delivery sending activity.
TraceMail can help answer questions such as:
* Was the message accepted by the Send API?
* Which Delivery account or domain sent it?
* Was the recipient suppressed?
* Was the message delivered, bounced, rejected, or delayed?
* What are the counters for a domain or account?
Useful areas in the reference include:
* Delivery dashboard.
* Delivery TraceMail accounts.
* Delivery TraceMail domains.
* Delivery TraceMail mailouts.
* Delivery TraceMail counters.
* Delivery TraceMail daily statistics.
## Email log analysis for Hosting [#email-log-analysis-for-hosting]
Use Email log analysis endpoints to inspect hosted email logs:
* mailbox access logs;
* incoming mail logs;
* outgoing mail logs;
* message folder lookup;
* PDF export of a specific log.
Email log analysis is for Hosting mailbox traffic. Delivery TraceMail is for Delivery sending traffic.
## Basic troubleshooting checklist [#basic-troubleshooting-checklist]
### Send API request rejected [#send-api-request-rejected]
1. Check the HTTP status.
2. Check the `error` code and `message`.
3. Confirm the Delivery account exists and is the right sender for this integration.
4. Confirm the bearer token belongs to that Delivery account.
5. Confirm the sending domain is configured for the account.
6. Confirm the client IP is allowed by token and account allow-lists.
7. Confirm the account is enabled and has quota.
8. Confirm the payload respects size and batch limits.
### Message accepted but not found in final delivery logs [#message-accepted-but-not-found-in-final-delivery-logs]
1. Confirm the request returned `202 Accepted`.
2. Store and search by `request_id` and `message_id`.
3. Check account/domain assignment and DNS verification.
4. Check suppression-list behavior.
5. Check Delivery account status and quota.
6. If the issue persists, contact support with `request_id`, `message_id`, timestamp, sender, and recipient.
### Hosting domain or mailbox not active [#hosting-domain-or-mailbox-not-active]
1. Check the resource `status` and `status_detail`.
2. Confirm ownership and DNS checks.
3. Confirm the authenticated user has access to the resource.
4. For mailbox traffic, inspect Email log analysis access, incoming, and outgoing logs.
## Internal queue endpoints [#internal-queue-endpoints]
Some operational endpoints exist for Qboxmail staff to inspect and retry failed queue jobs. They are not intended for customer integrations.
For customer integrations, use Send API responses, Delivery TraceMail, resource status, and support when needed.
# Management API fundamentals (/en/api/concepts/management-api)
Use the Management API to create, configure, and check Hosting and Delivery resources: domains, mailboxes, Delivery accounts, suppression lists, logs, reports, migrations, and more.
## What you can manage [#what-you-can-manage]
### Hosting resources [#hosting-resources]
* Domains and domain ownership checks.
* Mailboxes and postmaster accounts.
* Email aliases and domain aliases.
* Email signatures.
* Address books and contacts.
* Imports, migrations, and Vault archiving.
* Email log analysis logs for access, incoming mail, and outgoing mail.
### Delivery resources [#delivery-resources]
* Delivery dashboard data.
* Delivery domains and DNS verification.
* Delivery accounts for transactional or newsletter sending.
* Delivery suppression lists.
* Delivery TraceMail logs, counters, daily statistics, accounts, and domains.
### Account and delegation resources [#account-and-delegation-resources]
* Managers.
* Team members.
* Permissions and assigned resources.
* Reports and exports.
## Authentication [#authentication]
Management API requests use the `X-Api-Token` header.
```bash
curl "https://api.qboxmail.com/api/delivery/accounts" \
-H "X-Api-Token: "
```
The authenticated user controls the scope of each request. For example, a manager sees only assigned resources, while a customer sees the customer's resources.
## Billing profile requirement [#billing-profile-requirement]
In production, an API token can manage billable resources only after the customer has a billing profile in Qboxmail billing. If the customer has no billing profile yet, log into the Qboxmail panel and complete the first order before automating paid provisioning with the Management API.
This requirement applies to API-token requests that create or change billable service resources, for example:
* creating Hosting domains, mailboxes, imports, migrations, or Vault imports;
* creating Delivery accounts;
* changing Delivery plans or buying extra Delivery messages.
Active, non-expired Hosting trial customers and Free Hosting customers can manage Hosting resources via API without a billing profile. This exception applies only to Hosting resources, not Delivery. The sandbox environment also does not require a production billing profile.
If the billing profile is missing, production API-token provisioning requests return `403 Forbidden` with a message telling the user to complete the first order in the panel.
## Response model [#response-model]
Most successful Management API responses look like this:
```json
{
"resources": [],
"pagination": {}
}
```
List endpoints return resources plus pagination details. Single-resource endpoints usually return one item inside `resources`. Delete endpoints often return `204 No Content`.
## Resource status [#resource-status]
Many Management API operations start background work. For example, domain activation, DNS verification, mailbox provisioning, DKIM setup, and some deletions can be asynchronous.
When a resource includes status fields, treat them as part of the workflow:
* `status`: whether the resource is enabled or active.
* `status_detail`: why the resource is waiting, updating, disabled, or blocked.
* DNS or approval status fields: whether external configuration is complete.
## What this API does not do [#what-this-api-does-not-do]
The Management API does **not** send email content. It creates and configures the Delivery account, sending domains, suppression lists, and other resources that the Send API later uses to send email.
If the request changes a Qboxmail resource, use the Management API. If the request sends email through an existing Delivery account, use the Send API.
# Responses and pagination (/en/api/concepts/responses-pagination)
Qboxmail APIs return different response formats depending on which API you use.
## Management API responses [#management-api-responses]
Most Management API responses look like this:
```json
{
"resources": [],
"pagination": {}
}
```
For list endpoints, `resources` contains the current page of items and `pagination` contains navigation metadata.
```json
{
"resources": [
{
"code": "DD66042061",
"name": "example.com"
}
],
"pagination": {
"per": 25,
"page": 1,
"total_pages": 1,
"query": null,
"filter": null,
"status": null,
"sort_field": null,
"sort": null,
"total_records": 1
}
}
```
For single-resource endpoints, `resources` usually contains one item. For delete operations, the response may be `204 No Content`.
## Pagination parameters [#pagination-parameters]
Common list endpoints support some or all of these query parameters:
| Parameter | Description |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `page` | Page number. Defaults to `1`. |
| `per` | Number of records per page. Defaults commonly to `25`. |
| `query` | Text search/filter, when supported by the endpoint. |
| `status` | Status filter, when supported. |
| `sort_field` | Field used for sorting, when supported. |
| `sort` | Sort direction, usually `asc` or `desc`. |
| `pick` | Optional field/resource selector on endpoints that support it. |
Always check the endpoint reference for the exact filters supported by each resource.
## Send API responses [#send-api-responses]
The Send API does not paginate `/v1/send` or `/v1/send/bulk` responses. It returns the messages accepted in that request.
These responses require a Send API token from an existing Delivery account. If the Delivery account, sending domain, or token is missing, fix that setup before expecting accepted-message responses.
```json
{
"error_code": 0,
"message": "OK",
"request_id": "f43eb659-beb4-4f8a-a737-2d403998f4cf",
"queued_messages": 1,
"messages": [
{
"error_code": 0,
"message": "OK",
"request_id": "f43eb659-beb4-4f8a-a737-2d403998f4cf",
"message_id": "8a16f3df-7f5f-4e53-a7e7-3e665ef57c51@example.test",
"submitted_at": "2026-04-16T08:41:13.225Z",
"to": "john@example.com"
}
],
"suppression_summary": {
"status": "checked",
"checked_recipients": 1,
"accepted_recipients": 1,
"suppressed_recipients": 0,
"suppressed_emails": []
}
}
```
## Field naming [#field-naming]
Public request and response fields use `snake_case`.
Examples:
* `request_id`
* `message_id`
* `queued_messages`
* `suppression_summary`
* `total_records`
# Sandbox environment (/en/api/concepts/sandbox)
The Qboxmail sandbox is a separate environment for testing the Qboxmail panel and Management API without affecting real domains, mailboxes, or Delivery settings.
The sandbox is available for Management API testing. It does not support Send API endpoints such as `/v1/send` or `/v1/send/bulk`.
You can request sandbox access from the Qboxmail website: [Request Sandbox access](https://www.qboxmail.com/features/api/request-sandbox-access/).
After you send the form, Qboxmail creates your sandbox access and sends the details by email. The team may also contact you by phone or email to explain how the environment works.
## Sandbox vs production [#sandbox-vs-production]
Sandbox resources are separate from production.
| Environment | API host | Use it for |
| ----------- | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Production | `https://api.qboxmail.com` | Real customer data and services |
| Sandbox | `https://sandbox.qboxmail.com` | Management API tests, experiments, and integration development |
To call a Management API endpoint in sandbox, replace the production host with the sandbox host.
```bash
curl "https://sandbox.qboxmail.com/api/domains" \
-H "X-Api-Token: "
```
## Billing and Delivery behavior [#billing-and-delivery-behavior]
Sandbox is meant for testing Management API workflows, so it does not require a production billing profile or a completed first order.
You can use sandbox credentials to test resource setup flows, such as creating Hosting domains, mailboxes, Delivery domains, Delivery accounts, API tokens, and suppression-list entries.
Delivery resources created in sandbox are for configuration and Management API testing. They are not production sending resources, they do not prove that production sending is ready, and you cannot use them to send email with the Send API.
## Data cleanup [#data-cleanup]
Use sandbox for disposable domains, mailbox provisioning, and general API experiments. It is not permanent: sandbox resources are cleaned up every Sunday at 03:03 CEST. If something disappears, rerun the flow to recreate it.
Do not store sandbox resource IDs or codes in permanent configuration, and do not use sandbox data as a reference for production.
## Best practices [#best-practices]
* Use separate sandbox credentials and tokens.
* Test operations that delete or change data, provisioning flows, and error handling in sandbox first.
* Keep sandbox and production configuration clearly separated in your application.
* Move to production only after the full workflow has been tested with production credentials, production domains, and the correct DNS configuration.
# Send API fundamentals (/en/api/concepts/send-api)
Use the Send API to send email over HTTP through an existing Delivery account. It checks the message, reserves quota, queues delivery, and returns message details.
The Send API does not create senders, domains, or API tokens. Before calling `/v1/send` or `/v1/send/bulk`, create a Delivery account, configure at least one sending domain, and create a Send API token from that Delivery account.
## Available send modes [#available-send-modes]
| Endpoint | Use it for |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| `POST /v1/send` | One complete message, or a batch of complete messages. |
| `POST /v1/send/bulk` | One templated message rendered for many recipients. |
## How sending works [#how-sending-works]
1. A Delivery account, sending domain, and Send API token already exist.
2. Your application calls `/v1/send` or `/v1/send/bulk` with that Send API bearer token.
3. The API validates the token, IP policy, payload, rate limit, and quota.
4. The API performs a suppression-list pre-check to estimate accepted recipients.
5. The API reserves quota counters.
6. The API queues messages asynchronously.
7. The API returns `202 Accepted` with `request_id`, `message_id`, and `suppression_summary`.
8. Workers compose and hand off messages to the delivery pipeline.
9. Final delivery events are visible through Delivery TraceMail.
A `202 Accepted` response means the Send API accepted the message for delivery. It does not mean the message reached the inbox.
## `/v1/send` [#v1send]
Use `/v1/send` when each message already contains its final recipients and content.
```json
{
"messages": [
{
"from": "sender@example.com",
"to": ["john@example.com"],
"subject": "Hello",
"text_body": "Hello from Qboxmail Delivery"
}
]
}
```
Use a batch when you need to queue multiple different messages in one request.
## `/v1/send/bulk` [#v1sendbulk]
Use `/v1/send/bulk` when one base message should be rendered for many recipients.
```json
{
"message": {
"from": "sender@example.com",
"subject": "Welcome {{first_name}}",
"html_body": "Hello {{first_name}}
"
},
"recipients": [
{
"email": "john@example.com",
"substitutions": {
"first_name": "John"
}
}
]
}
```
Bulk templates use Handlebars-style variables such as `{{first_name}}`. The special `{{email}}` variable is always available.
By default, `strict_substitutions` is enabled: each recipient must provide every variable used by the template. Set `options.strict_substitutions` to `false` only when missing variables may safely render as empty strings.
## Response shape [#response-shape]
Successful Send API responses look like this:
```json
{
"error_code": 0,
"message": "OK",
"request_id": "f43eb659-beb4-4f8a-a737-2d403998f4cf",
"queued_messages": 1,
"messages": [
{
"error_code": 0,
"message": "OK",
"request_id": "f43eb659-beb4-4f8a-a737-2d403998f4cf",
"message_id": "8a16f3df-7f5f-4e53-a7e7-3e665ef57c51@example.test",
"submitted_at": "2026-04-16T08:41:13.225Z",
"to": "john@example.com"
}
],
"suppression_summary": {
"status": "checked",
"checked_recipients": 1,
"accepted_recipients": 1,
"suppressed_recipients": 0,
"suppressed_emails": []
}
}
```
Store `request_id` and `message_id`. They are the fastest way to correlate application logs with TraceMail and support investigations.
# Activation and access (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/activation-and-access)
## How to activate Email Archive [#how-to-activate-email-archive]
To activate the archive on one or more email accounts, follow the steps below:
1. Make sure your plan already includes the archive option: if you have the *monthly plan*, you can proceed independently; if you have the *annual plan*, please contact us to request a quote for adding archives.
2. Log in to the Control Panel and check/set, in the [domain limits](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/gestione/domini#impostazioni-del-dominio), the maximum number of archives that can be activated (set -1 if you want an unlimited number of archives).
3. Log in to the Control Panel and follow the [archive activation](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/archivio/gestione/aggiunta-archivio) procedure.
4. Once the archive has been activated, if you want to copy the messages currently in your mailbox to the archive, you need to perform a [message import](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/archivio/gestione/importazione-messaggi). When the import is complete, you will receive an email message.
5. Access the Archive and check that the message import completed successfully.
6. Now, if you want, you can delete some messages from your email account to free up space. These messages, if they are not older than the configured number of years, will remain in the archive in read-only mode.
## Accessing Email Archive [#accessing-email-archive]
To access Email Archive, the service must be activated on at least one domain and one email account.
Your domain administrator may have restricted access to your Archive to only
when you are connected to the company VPN.
Archived messages are viewed through their own interface, separate from Webmail, and can be accessed at
[https://vault.qboxmail.com](https://vault.qboxmail.com).
**Users** can access messages stored in the archive using the same login credentials as Webmail and,
where present, **Delegates** can access them using the User IDs assigned to them.
If you have enabled two-factor authentication (2FA), you will be asked to
enter an additional OTP code.
# Add archive (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/add-archive)
### Add email archive to a domain [#add-email-archive-to-a-domain]
To add the email archiving service to a domain, click *Archive* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the
`+ Archive` button, and complete the activation procedure steps. Once the procedure is complete, the archive will be active on the email accounts of the domain you
selected, and all new messages received and sent by those accounts will be archived automatically.
#### Step 1 - New archive [#step-1---new-archive]
Choose the domain and the email accounts belonging to it on which to activate the archive.
1. Select the domain on which you want to activate the archive.
2. Select the email accounts you want to archive.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be activated varies
based on the limits set.
#### Step 2 - Archive retention [#step-2---archive-retention]
Set the default retention period (from 1 to 10 years) for email accounts with archive.
Messages whose received / sent date exceeds the selected retention period
will be automatically deleted from the archive.
#### Step 3 - Archive new accounts [#step-3---archive-new-accounts]
Choose whether to automatically activate the archive by default for new email accounts that will be added to the domain.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be activated varies
based on the limits set.
#### Step 4 - New archive summary [#step-4---new-archive-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Activate` button. Once the creation procedure is complete, the email accounts with archive will be visible in your list of email accounts with archive.
The additional cost for accounts with active archive will be calculated based
on your account's billing type.
### Add email archive to one or more accounts [#add-email-archive-to-one-or-more-accounts]
To add the archiving service to one or more email accounts belonging to a domain with archive already active, click *Archive*
in the Control Panel sidebar, open the details of the domain to which you want to add the email account by clicking the domain name, click the `+ Email account` button, and complete the creation procedure steps. Once the procedure is complete, the email accounts will be visible in your list of email accounts with archive.
### Step 1 - New archive [#step-1---new-archive-1]
Choose the email accounts on which to activate the archive.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be activated varies
based on the limits set.
### Step 2 - New archive summary [#step-2---new-archive-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Activate` button. Once the creation procedure is complete, the email accounts with archive will be
visible in your list of email accounts with archive.
The additional cost for accounts with active archive will be calculated based
on your account's billing type.
# Add delegate (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/add-delegate)
To add a delegate, click *Archive* and then *Delegates* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the `+ Delegate` button, and
complete the steps in the creation procedure. Once the procedure is complete, the delegate will be visible in your list of delegates.
### Step 1 - New delegate [#step-1---new-delegate]
Enter the details of the user who will use the account.
1. Enter the first name of the user who will use the account.
2. Enter the last name of the user who will use the account.
3. Enter the name of the company the user who will use the account belongs to.
4. Enter the email address of the user who will use the account.
### Step 2 - Time limits [#step-2---time-limits]
Set the user's time limits for accessing the archive.
1. Set an expiration date for the user's account.
2. Set a time range for the user to view the content.
### Step 3 - Content access [#step-3---content-access]
Set the user's access limits for the archive content.
1. Select the domain that the accounts the user will be able to view belong to.
2. Select the email accounts the user will be able to view and choose which content to make visible:
| | |
| ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Subject** | The delegate can see only the sender / recipient, subject, and date of account messages. |
| **All** | The delegate can see the full content of account messages. |
| **Ignore** | The delegate is not authorized to view the account content. |
You can authorize the delegate to view accounts from multiple domains.
### Step 4 - Delegate creation summary [#step-4---delegate-creation-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Create` button. Once the delegate creation procedure is complete, the delegate will be visible in your
list of delegates.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/archive-introduction)
### What is Email Archive [#what-is-email-archive]
Email Archive is the [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it/?target=_blank) tool that lets you store and keep your
emails safe for up to 10 years. With the archive, you can store and view all your email messages in read-only mode,
with no storage limits and without the risk of deleting important messages.
The archive lets you:
* View archived messages divided between received and sent, organized by year
* Search for email messages using a full-text indexing system
* Mark important messages by clicking the star icon
* View the source code of a message: *year > received/sent > message > view source*
* View a message in .txt format: *year > received/sent > message > view .txt*
* Print a message: *year > received/sent > message > print*
* Export individual messages in .eml format: *year > received/sent > message > export*
* Download all or individual attachments of a message
### How Email Archive works [#how-email-archive-works]
Email Archive is an optional service, which can be enabled on an entire domain or on individual email accounts, that saves and stores a copy of all messages received and sent by users, fully in the cloud, with no software or plugins to install.
Email Archive has no storage limits.
When enabling the archive, you can archive some or all of the messages in your mailbox through a guided message import procedure. Once the archive is enabled, all messages sent and received by your email account will be automatically saved in the archive.
Messages are automatically divided between received and sent and organized
by year.
You can decide the number of years to archive, choosing a number of years between 1 and 10.
Messages with a sending or receiving date older than the number of years set
will be automatically deleted from the archive.
### Who can enable Email Archive [#who-can-enable-email-archive]
Enabling and managing the archive is delegated to the **Admin** and, if present, to the **Team Member** or **Manager** (if authorized). Each of them can enable, modify, or disable the archiving service on the domains they manage, based on customer requests and the limits of their profile or pricing plan.
### Who can access Email Archive [#who-can-access-email-archive]
Multiple people can access the Email Archive of an email account:
* **User** of the email account on which the archive has been enabled can access it with the same login credentials as the mailbox.
* **Delegate**, a person who can be assigned specific access privileges to users’ archives. The delegate account is strictly personal.
The [Delegate](/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delegate) is designed for companies that need to give access to their
archives to experts or external consultants, legal professionals, reviewers, auditors, or internal company delegates. Delegates can be created and managed by the
Admin, the Team Member and, if authorized, by Managers.
Discover all the features of [Email
Archive](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/archivio-email/) on the
Qboxmail website.
# Archive list (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/archive-list)
### List of domains with archive [#list-of-domains-with-archive]
The list of domains with archive includes all domains in Qboxmail systems on which the archiving service is active, with their
related detailed information. To view the list of archives, click *Archive* and then *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information included in the list of domains with archive:
* Status
* Name of the domain on which the archive is active
* Number of email accounts with archive enabled
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### List of email accounts with archive [#list-of-email-accounts-with-archive]
The list of email accounts with archive includes all email accounts belonging to a domain on which the archiving service is active,
with their related detailed information. To access the list of email accounts with archive enabled, click the name of the domain the
account belongs to in the list of domains with archive.
Information included in the list of email accounts with archive:
* Status
* Email account address with archive
* Number of archiving years
* Number of active delegates
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
# Archive settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/archive-settings)
### Domain archive settings [#domain-archive-settings]
To change archive settings, click the name of the domain you want to modify, where the archive is active, in the list of domains with archive, and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
#### Domain archiving [#domain-archiving]
Choose the default retention period for messages received and sent by the accounts in the domain.
The archiving duration is calculated starting from the date each individual
message was received / sent. Messages whose date exceeds the selected
retention period will be automatically deleted from the archive.
#### New accounts [#new-accounts]
Set automatic archive activation for new email accounts that will be added to the domain.
### Email account archive settings [#email-account-archive-settings]
To change archive settings, click the name of the email account you want to modify, where the archive is active, in the list of email accounts with archive, and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
#### Email account archiving [#email-account-archiving]
Choose the retention period for messages received and sent by the account.
The archiving duration is calculated starting from the date each individual
message was received / sent. Messages whose date exceeds the selected
retention period will be automatically deleted from the archive.
# Deactivate / reactivate an archive (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/deactivate-reactivate-archive)
### Deactivate / reactivate a domain archive [#deactivate--reactivate-a-domain-archive]
To **deactivate** the archive active on a domain, in the list of domains with archive click the More button next to the domain you want to deactivate and select *Deactivate* from the menu.
When you deactivate the archive, all messages received and sent by the domain’s email accounts with archive will continue to be archived, but you will not be able to access them.
To **reactivate** the archive active on a domain, in the list of domains with archive click the More button next to the domain you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When you reactivate the archive, all messages received and sent by the domain’s email accounts with archive will continue to be archived, and you will be able to access them.
## Deactivate / reactivate an email account archive [#deactivate--reactivate-an-email-account-archive]
To **deactivate** the archive active on an email account, in the list of email accounts with archive click the More button next to the account you want to deactivate and select *Deactivate* from the menu.
When you deactivate the archive, all messages received and sent by the account will continue to be archived, but you will not be able to access them.
To **reactivate** the archive active on an email account, in the list of email accounts with archive click the More button next to the account you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When you reactivate the archive, all messages received and sent by the account will continue to be archived, and you will be able to access them.
# Deactivate and reactivate a delegate (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/deactivate-reactivate-delegate)
To **deactivate** a delegate, in the delegate list click the More button next to the delegate you want to deactivate and select *Deactivate* from the menu.
When you deactivate a delegate, they will no longer be able to access the archive and will no longer be able to view account content.
To **reactivate** a delegate, in the delegate list click the More button next to the delegate you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When you reactivate a delegate, they will be able to access the archive and view account content.
# Delegate list (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delegate-list)
The delegate list includes all delegates in Qboxmail systems belonging to an Admin, together with their detailed information. To view the delegate list, click *Archive* and then *Delegates* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the delegate list:
* Delegate status.
* Delegate name.
* Delegate code.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
# Delegate settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delegate-settings)
To change a delegate’s settings, click the name of the manager you want to edit in the delegates list and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
### Password [#password]
Change the delegate’s password for accessing the archive.
### Time limits [#time-limits]
Change the delegate’s archive access limits set during creation.
### Content access [#content-access]
Change the domains and accounts that the delegate can view.
# Delegate (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delegate)
### Who is the Delegate? [#who-is-the-delegate]
The Delegate is a user authorized to access the email archive of one or more accounts within specific limits. The delegate’s account is personal and must be treated as such.
### Who can appoint a Delegate? [#who-can-appoint-a-delegate]
The delegate can be appointed by an Admin, a Team member, or a Manager authorized to enable archives.
To create a delegate, you must have an email account with an active archive.
### What functions does the Delegate have? [#what-functions-does-the-delegate-have]
The delegate can access part or all of the archive content of one or more email accounts in order to carry out internal audits or actions related to company protection. The delegate’s access to the archive can be limited in time, and the time range of the messages visible to them can also be restricted. All activities performed by the Delegate are tracked in a dedicated activity log (AuditLog).
# Delete an archive (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delete-archive)
## Delete a domain archive [#delete-a-domain-archive]
To **delete** the active archive on a domain, in the list of domains with an archive, click the More button next to the domain you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
When you delete the archive, all archived messages for the domain's email accounts with an archive will be permanently deleted.
Deleting a domain archive is irreversible.
## Delete an email account archive [#delete-an-email-account-archive]
To **delete** the active archive on an email account, in the list of email accounts with an archive, click the More button next to the account you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
When you delete the archive, all archived messages for the account will be permanently deleted.
Deleting an email account archive is irreversible.
# Delete delegate (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/delete-delegate)
To **delete** a delegate from the delegates list, click the More button next to the delegate you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting a delegate will delete the corresponding account and the permissions assigned to it.
Deleting a delegate is irreversible.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/archive/message-imports)
To **import** messages from an email account with archiving enabled, click the name of the email account in the list of email accounts with an archive, select *Details* from the available tabs, and click the `Start import` button.
* *Archive* > *Domain name* > *Email account name* > *Details* > `Start import`
The import lets you add to the archive all old messages currently present in an email account, dividing them by year between received and sent messages. The import will go back in time for a period equal to the number of archiving years set for the account archive.
You can import only messages from an email account configured with the IMAP
protocol.
1. Click the `Start import` button.
2. Select the folders in the email account and choose where to archive the messages they contain.
3. Complete the procedure by clicking the `Import` button.
| Folders | Description |
| -------- | --------------------------------------------------- |
| Received | The folder content is archived in received messages |
| Sent | The folder content is archived in sent messages |
| Ignore | The folder content is not archived |
The import procedure can be performed only once and may take several hours to
complete.
When the procedure is complete, a confirmation email will be sent. You can follow the import status from the details section of the email account.
Once the import is complete, you can, if necessary, delete the messages from
the email account to free up space.
# Access (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/access)
The Control Panel is available at [https://panel.qboxmail.com](https://panel.qboxmail.com) by entering the email address and password chosen when registering for the free trial.
You can change the login email address from your account settings once you have logged in to the Control Panel.
If you lose your password, you can recover it using the dedicated link on the login page at [https://panel.qboxmail.com](https://panel.qboxmail.com) .
The following can access the panel:
* Admin
* Team member
* Manager
* Postmaster
* Users
Each of these roles has its own login credentials and accesses the panel area
intended for its role.
Through the Control Panel, you can associate up to two roles, including User, with a single email address.
For example, a customer who entered the address [mario.rossi@dominio.it](mailto:mario.rossi@dominio.it) as the Admin username and also has an email account with Qboxmail can access the panel as Admin or as User.
| Role | Username | Password | I log in as... |
| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Admin** | [mario.rossi@dominio.com](mailto:mario.rossi@dominio.com) | Panel password | Admin, can manage all domains and email accounts, assign roles, etc. |
| **User** | [mario.rossi@dominio.com](mailto:mario.rossi@dominio.com) | Email account password | User, you can view and manage your account settings within the allowed limits |
If you have set the same username and password for both the email account and
the panel, you will access the latter with the highest role and can manage it
from your account Settings. You cannot use the same email address for Admin,
Team Member, and Manager.
# Activity log (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/activity-log)
The activity log lists all activities performed by accounts belonging to a specific Admin and related to the use of Qboxmail services. The log is also a tool for analyzing operations performed in the event of errors or security breaches.
For each action, the following information is shown:
* Date when the action was performed.
* Account of the user who performed the action.
* Brief description of the action performed.
* Country where the action was performed.
* Extract from the technical system log of the action performed.
You can filter actions by:
* Time interval in which the actions were performed.
* User who performed the actions.
* Type of action.
* Object of the actions.
* Area of interest of the actions.
By selecting Include log searches in results, you can also display the searches
performed among the advanced search results.
# Archive (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/archive)
Archive is a service that can be enabled on a domain's email accounts to automatically archive, search, and export all messages
received and sent by those accounts in the cloud, retaining them for up to 10 years with no storage space limits.
To enable an archive, you must have at least one active domain.
Archive is an optional paid service.
### List of domains with archive [#list-of-domains-with-archive]
The list of domains with archive includes all domains in Qboxmail systems on which the archiving service is active, with their
detailed information. To view the archive list, click *Archive* and then *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the list of domains with archive:
* Status
* Name of the domain on which the archive is active
* Number of email accounts with archive enabled
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### List of email accounts with archive [#list-of-email-accounts-with-archive]
The list of email accounts with archive includes all email accounts belonging to a domain on which the archiving service is active,
with their detailed information. To access the list of email accounts with active archive, click the name of the domain the
account belongs to in the list of domains with archive.
Information shown in the list of email accounts with archive:
* Status
* Email account address with archive
* Number of archive years
* Number of active delegates
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### Add archive to a domain [#add-archive-to-a-domain]
To add the archive service to a domain, click *Archive* in the Control Panel sidebar,
click the `Archive` button, and complete the activation procedure steps. Once the procedure is completed, the archive will be active
on the email accounts of the domain you selected and all new messages received and sent by those accounts will be archived automatically.
#### Step 1 - New archive [#step-1---new-archive]
Choose the domain and the email accounts belonging to it on which to enable the archive.
1. Select the domain on which you want to enable the archive.
2. Select the email accounts you want to archive.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be enabled varies
based on the configured limits.
#### Step 2 - Archive retention [#step-2---archive-retention]
Set the default retention period (from 1 to 10 years) for email accounts with archive.
Messages whose receipt / sending date exceeds the selected
retention period will be automatically deleted from the archive.
#### Step 3 - Archive new accounts [#step-3---archive-new-accounts]
Choose whether to automatically enable the archive by default for new email accounts that will be added to the domain.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be enabled varies
based on the configured limits.
#### Step 4 - New archive summary [#step-4---new-archive-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Activate` button. Once the creation procedure is completed, email accounts with archive will be visible in your list of email accounts with archive.
The additional cost of accounts with archive enabled will be calculated based
on your account's billing type.
### Add archive to one or more email accounts [#add-archive-to-one-or-more-email-accounts]
To add the archive service to one or more email accounts belonging to a domain with archive already active, click *Archive* in the
Control Panel sidebar, open the details of the domain to which you want to add the email account by clicking the domain name, click the
`+ Email account` button, and complete the creation procedure steps. Once the procedure is completed, the email accounts will be visible
in your list of email accounts with archive.
#### Step 1 - New archive [#step-1---new-archive-1]
Choose the email accounts on which to enable the archive.
The number of email accounts on which the archive can be enabled varies
based on the configured limits.
#### Step 2 - New archive summary [#step-2---new-archive-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Activate` button. Once the creation procedure is completed, email accounts with archive will be
visible in your list of email accounts with archive.
The additional cost of accounts with archive enabled will be calculated based
on your account's billing type.
### Domain archive settings [#domain-archive-settings]
To change an archive setting, click the name of the domain with archive enabled that you want to modify in the list of
domains with archive and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
#### Domain archiving [#domain-archiving]
Choose the default retention period for messages received and sent by the domain's accounts.
The archive duration is calculated starting from the receipt /
sending date of each individual message. Messages whose date exceeds the selected
retention period will be automatically deleted from the archive.
#### New accounts [#new-accounts]
Set automatic archive activation for new email accounts that will be added to the domain.
### Email account archive settings [#email-account-archive-settings]
To change an archive setting, click the name of the email account with archive enabled that you want to modify in
the list of email accounts with archive and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
#### Email account archiving [#email-account-archiving]
Choose the retention period for messages received and sent by the account.
The archive duration is calculated starting from the receipt /
sending date of each individual message. Messages whose date exceeds the selected
retention period will be automatically deleted from the archive.
### Import messages from an email account into the archive [#import-messages-from-an-email-account-into-the-archive]
To **import** messages present in an email account with archive enabled, click the name of the email account in the list of email accounts with
archive, select *Details* from the available tabs, and click the `Start import` button.
Importing lets you add to the archive all old messages currently present in an email account, dividing them by year between
received and sent. The import will go back in time for a period equal to the archive years configured for the account archive.
You can import only messages from an email account configured with the
IMAP protocol.
1. Click the `Start import` button.
2. Select the folders present in the email account and choose where to archive the messages they contain.
| | |
| -------- | ----------------------------------------------------- |
| Received | The folder contents are archived in received messages |
| Sent | The folder contents are archived in sent messages |
| Ignore | The folder contents are not archived |
3. Complete the procedure by clicking the `Import` button.
The import procedure can be performed only once and may
take a few hours to complete.
At the end of the procedure, a confirmation email will be sent. You can follow the import status in the email mailbox details section.
Once the import is finished, if necessary, you can delete the
messages from the email account to free up space.
### Disable / re-enable a domain archive [#disable--re-enable-a-domain-archive]
To **disable** the active archive on a domain, in the list of domains with archive click the More button
next to the domain you want to disable and select *Disable* from the menu.
When the archive is re-enabled, all messages received and sent by the domain's email accounts with archive will continue to be archived, and you will be able to access them.
## Disable / re-enable an email account archive [#disable--re-enable-an-email-account-archive]
To **disable** the active archive on an email account, in the list of email accounts with archive click the More button
next to the account you want to disable and select *Disable* from the menu.
When the archive is disabled, all messages received and sent by the account will continue to be archived, but you will not be able to access them.
To **re-enable** the active archive on an email account, in the list of email accounts with archive click the More button
next to the account you want to re-enable and select *Re-enable* from the menu.
When the archive is re-enabled, all messages received and sent by the account will continue to be archived, and you will be able to access them.
### Delete a domain archive [#delete-a-domain-archive]
To **delete** the active archive on a domain, in the list of domains with archive click the More button
next to the domain you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete`
button inside the modal.
Deleting the archive permanently deletes all archived messages of the domain's email accounts with archive.
Deleting a domain archive is irreversible.
### Delete an email account archive [#delete-an-email-account-archive]
To **delete** the active archive on an email account, in the list of email accounts with archive click the More button
next to the account you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete`
button inside the modal.
Deleting the archive permanently deletes all archived messages of the account.
Deleting an email account archive is irreversible.
# Customizations (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/customizations)
Customizations let you change the appearance of the Control Panel, webmail, and Mail Time Machine
with a dedicated logo and company name for your users, both globally (general customization) and for each domain
(domain customization).
When you enable a customization, the logo associated with the domain will appear on the login screen of the Control Panel, webmail, and
Mail Time Machine, while the company name will be used to build the web page title.
Already when adding a customization, the panel generates a preview of how it will appear to users, so you can view it
without having to save it.
### Enable a general customization [#enable-a-general-customization]
The general customization is applied to all existing domains, unless a specific customization exists for an individual domain.
You can add only one general customization.
To **enable** a general customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar, select
*General* from the available tabs, and click the `+ Customization` button.
1. Enter your company name.
2. Enter a link for redirecting users to customer support.
3. Upload your logo.
4. Check in the preview that the logo and name are displayed correctly.
5. Complete the procedure by clicking the `Create` button.
The logo must be in JPG, JPEG, PNG, or SVG format and have a maximum size
of 480 x 96 pixels. Smaller images will be scaled
proportionally.
The use of illegal or copyrighted images is strictly prohibited.
### Enable a domain customization [#enable-a-domain-customization]
A domain customization is applied to one or more specific domains.
Domain logo customization is available only in
Professional and Enterprise plans.
To **enable** a domain customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar, select
*By domain* from the available tabs, and click the `+ Customization` button.
1. Select the domains to which the customization should be applied.
2. Enter your company name.
3. Enter a link for redirecting users to customer support.
4. Upload your logo.
5. Check in the preview that the logo and name are displayed correctly.
6. Complete the procedure by clicking the `Create` button.
The logo must be in JPG, JPEG, PNG, or SVG format and have a maximum size
of 480 x 96 pixels. Smaller images will be scaled
proportionally.
The use of illegal or copyrighted images is strictly prohibited.
### Edit a general customization [#edit-a-general-customization]
To **edit** a general customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar,
select *General* from the available tabs, click the More button for the customization
you want to edit, and select *Edit* from the menu.
### Edit a domain customization [#edit-a-domain-customization]
To **edit** a domain customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar, select *By domain* from the available tabs, click the More button
for the customization you want to edit, and select *Edit* from the menu.
### Delete a general customization [#delete-a-general-customization]
To **delete** a general customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar, select
*General* from the available tabs, click the More button
for the customization you want to delete, and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button inside the modal.
Deleting a general customization is
irreversible.
### Delete a domain customization [#delete-a-domain-customization]
To **delete** a domain customization, click *Customizations* in the Control Panel sidebar, select
*By domain* from the available tabs, click the More button for the customization you want to delete,
and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button inside the modal.
Deleting a domain customization is
irreversible.
# Delegates (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/delegates)
**Who is a Delegate?**
A Delegate is a user authorized to access the archive of one or more email accounts within certain limits. A Delegate account is personal and should be used only by that user.
**Who can create a Delegate?**
A Delegate can be created by an Admin, a Team member, or a Manager authorized to enable archives.
To create a delegate, you must have an email account with an active archive.
**What can a Delegate do?**
A Delegate can access some or all archived content for one or more email accounts, for example to support internal audits or company protection processes. Archive access can be time-limited, and the visible message date range can also be restricted. All Delegate activity is tracked in a dedicated log.
### Delegate list [#delegate-list]
The Delegate list shows all Delegates associated with an Admin in Qboxmail, along with their details. To view the Delegate list, click *Archive* and then *Delegates* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the delegate list:
* Delegate status.
* Delegate name.
* Delegate code.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### Add a delegate [#add-a-delegate]
To add a Delegate, click *Delegates* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the `+ Delegate` button, and complete the creation steps. Once complete, the Delegate will be visible in your Delegate list.
#### Step 1 - New delegate [#step-1---new-delegate]
Enter the user's details.
1. Enter the user's first name.
2. Enter the user's last name.
3. Enter the user's company name.
4. Enter the user's email address.
#### Step 2 - Time limits [#step-2---time-limits]
Set the time limits for the user's access to the archive.
1. Set an expiration date for the user's account.
2. Set a time range for the user to view content.
### Step 3 - Content access [#step-3---content-access]
Set the user's archive content access limits.
1. Select the domain for the accounts the user can view.
2. Select the email accounts the user can view and choose which content to make visible:
| | |
| ----------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Subject** | The delegate can only see sender / recipient, subject, and date of the messages in the account. |
| **All** | The delegate can see the full content of the messages in the account. |
| **Ignore** | The delegate is not authorized to view the content of the account. |
You can authorize the delegate to view accounts from multiple domains.
#### Step 4 - Delegate creation summary [#step-4---delegate-creation-summary]
To complete the procedure, click the `Create` button. Once the Delegate has been created, they will be visible in your Delegate list.
### Delegate access to the archive [#delegate-access-to-the-archive]
A Delegate can access the archive at [https://vault.qboxmail.com](https://vault.qboxmail.com/) using their User ID and the password chosen when activating the account.
### Delegate settings [#delegate-settings]
To change a delegate's settings, click the name of the delegate you want to edit in the delegate list and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
#### Password [#password]
Change the delegate's password for accessing the archive.
#### Time limits [#time-limits]
Change the delegate's archive access limits set during creation.
#### Content access [#content-access]
Change the domains and accounts the delegate can view.
### Disable / re-enable a delegate [#disable--re-enable-a-delegate]
To **disable** a delegate, in the delegate list click the More button next to the delegate you want to disable and select *Disable* from the menu.
When you disable a Delegate, they can no longer access the archive or view account content.
To **re-enable** a delegate, in the delegate list click the More button next to the delegate you want to re-enable and select *Re-enable* from the menu.
When you re-enable a Delegate, they can access the archive and view account content again.
### Delete a delegate [#delete-a-delegate]
To **delete** a delegate, in the delegate list click the More button next to the delegate you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting a delegate will delete the corresponding account and the authorizations assigned to it.
Deleting a delegate is irreversible.
# DKIM Signature (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/dkim-signature)
The DKIM signature (DomainKeys Identified Mail) is an email message authentication method that identifies the actual identity of the domain that
sends the message and helps prevent spoofing on outgoing messages. All messages sent through Qboxmail SMTP servers are digitally signed,
by default, with a shared DKIM signature to increase their reputation and ensure greater security, but you can also
set up a custom DKIM signature for each domain.
### What is a custom DKIM signature used for? [#what-is-a-custom-dkim-signature-used-for]
A dedicated DKIM signature can be useful to isolate your domain’s reputation from that of others using the shared signature. A
custom signature is also required to enable specific services such as DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting & Conformance), a tool
useful for countering email spoofing.
### Add a custom DKIM signature [#add-a-custom-dkim-signature]
To add a custom DKIM signature, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar, select the name of the domain for which
you want to set the signature, then select *Settings* from the available tabs. Go to the domain *Security* settings and scroll to the
*Custom DKIM signature* section. To enable the DKIM signature, click the `Enable DKIM` button, then follow the guided procedure to create the signature.
#### Step 1 - Generate the DKIM signature [#step-1---generate-the-dkim-signature]
1. Click the `Enable DKIM` button and generate the selector and public key for your DKIM signature.
The selector is the first part (e.g. `qbm1807252189._domainkey`), while the public key is the part that starts with `v=DKIM1; k=rsa; p=MIGfMA…`
#### Step 2 - Edit your domain DNS settings [#step-2---edit-your-domain-dns-settings]
1. Log in to your domain DNS management panel.
2. Enter the selector as a TXT record in the *subdomain* field (the name may vary depending on the DNS panel).
3. Enter the full public key as a TXT record in the *value* field.
It may take up to 24 hours for the newly added record to become active.
#### Step 3 - Verify the signature DNS [#step-3---verify-the-signature-dns]
1. Open the security settings of the domain for which you are enabling the custom signature. In the *Custom DKIM signature* section,
click the `Verify DKIM configuration` button.
The system will immediately check the records entered in DNS. If the check is successful, your custom DKIM signature will become active
within a few minutes. As a result, all messages sent through Qboxmail SMTP servers with a sender address from your domain will contain the
custom digital signature.
If the verification procedure is not successful, check that the DNS settings
are correct and, if the issue persists after 24 hours, contact our technical
support. An unverified DKIM signature is automatically removed from the system
after 7 days.
If the TXT records in the domain DNS related to the DKIM signature are
removed, our SMTP servers will continue to sign emails, but the signature will
no longer be verifiable.
If you remove the TXT records from DNS, you must also remove the custom DKIM signature from the Qboxmail Control Panel.
### Verify the DKIM signature with Email log analysis [#verify-the-dkim-signature-with-email-log-analysis]
[Email log analysis](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/tracemail), the system that lets you analyze email traffic logs in real time, can verify that the custom DKIM signature is correctly applied to your domain or, alternatively, can verify that the shared signature is still present.
To view which DKIM signature is applied to messages:
1. Click Email log analysis in the Control Panel sidebar
2. Select *Sent Mail* as the action type
3. Enter the name of the domain whose logs you want to view
4. Enter the name of an email account whose logs you want to view
After completing the fields, the search results will appear, if any. For each sent email, by clicking Show Details, you can view the fields that contain the details of the domain and DKIM selector applied to that specific sending:
* DKIM selector
* DKIM domain
### Delete a custom DKIM signature [#delete-a-custom-dkim-signature]
To delete a custom DKIM signature, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar, select the name of the domain for
which you set the signature, then select *Settings* from the available tabs. Go to the domain *Security* settings and, in the
*Custom DKIM signature* section, click the `Disable DKIM` button.
Your custom DKIM signature will be removed from the system within a few minutes and emails will go back to being signed with the shared signature.
# Domain aliases (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/domain-aliases)
A domain alias is an alternative name for the real domain it is linked to and inherits all of its email accounts and email aliases.
A real domain can have multiple domain aliases, but not the other way around. A domain alias, like the real domain, can receive emails, which are then delivered
to the corresponding mailbox on the real domain.
Domain aliases have no additional cost. Access to services always takes place
through the email address of the real domain.
### Domain aliases list [#domain-aliases-list]
The domain aliases list includes all domain aliases in Qboxmail systems that can be managed by a specific user
(Admin, Team member, Manager, Postmaster), with their detailed information.
To view the list of domain aliases associated with a real domain, click the domain name in the domains list and
select *Domain aliases* from the available tabs.
Information shown in the domain aliases list:
* Domain alias status
* Domain alias name
* Domain alias code
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### Add a domain alias [#add-a-domain-alias]
To add a domain alias, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar and open the details of the domain you want to associate
the alias with by clicking its name. Select *Domain aliases* from the available tabs, click the `+ Domain alias` button, and enter the name of the domain alias
you want to add.
Once the procedure is complete, the domain alias will be visible in the list of domain aliases associated with your domain and you will only need to verify its ownership to make it fully operational.
### Domain alias ownership verification [#domain-alias-ownership-verification]
Before you can use a domain alias, as with real domains, you must prove that you own it or are authorized to
manage it by following the same [verification methods](/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/domains#domain-ownership-verification) used for real domains.
### Delete a domain alias [#delete-a-domain-alias]
To **delete** a domain alias from the domain aliases list, click the Trash button ,
next to the domain alias you want to delete, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
## IDN domain aliases (with special characters) [#idn-domain-aliases-with-special-characters]
You can activate IDN (Internationalized Domain Name) domain aliases. IDN domain activation is limited to domain aliases only,
so you must first activate a real domain and associate an IDN domain alias with it.
# Domains (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/domains)
A domain is the container for all corresponding email accounts, alias domains, and email aliases. In Qboxmail systems, domain management only refers to email account hosting, not to the entire domain, which remains registered with its relevant provider.
Before you can activate accounts, you must add and activate one or more domains that you own or are authorized to manage.
### Domain list [#domain-list]
The domain list includes all domains in Qboxmail systems that can be managed by a specific user (Admin, Team member, Manager, Postmaster), with their detailed information.
* By clicking the domain name, you access the management of the accounts that belong to it and its settings.
* By clicking the More button you can delete or disable/reactivate domains.
Information shown in the domain list:
* Domain status
* Number of email accounts in the domain (existing accounts / total available accounts)
* Number of active alias domains
* Number of active email aliases
* Domain plan
| Status | Description |
| ---------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
|
| Updating |
|
| Waiting for ownership verification |
|
| Active |
|
| Active with MX records to update or verify |
|
| Disabled |
|
| With errors (contact our technical support team) |
### Add a domain [#add-a-domain]
To add a domain, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar, then click the `+ Domain` button and complete the steps in the
creation wizard. Once the wizard is complete, the domain will be visible in your domain list.
#### Step 1 - Select plan [#step-1---select-plan]
[Choose the plan](/en/guides/email-hosting/available-plans) (Basic, Professional, or Enterprise) you want to assign to the domain you are creating from the available options, according to your needs.
The features available for all email accounts belonging to a domain vary based
on the selected plan.
#### Step 2 - Domain data [#step-2---domain-data]
1. Enter the name of the domain you want to create (e.g. mydomain.it).
2. Enter the company name or the domain owner's name.
3. Fill in the fields related to the company / owner profile\*.
4. Set a default language and time zone for the domain.
5. Choose a password for the Postmaster user, which will be created automatically together with the domain.
\*Not available for the Basic plan.
#### Step 3 - Domain limits [#step-3---domain-limits]
1. Set the number of 8GB email accounts that can be activated within the domain.
2. Set the number of 25GB email accounts that can be activated within the domain.
3. Set the number of 50GB email accounts that can be activated within the domain.
4. Set the number of 100GB email accounts that can be activated within the domain.
5. Set the number of Archives that can be activated for the domain.
6. Select a default size to use when creating new email accounts within the domain.
7. Set a maximum size for the domain's email accounts.
Although it is possible to set a different size, for billing purposes the
system only distinguishes between 8 and 25GB accounts.
#### Step 4 - Services available for the domain [#step-4---services-available-for-the-domain]
Choose which services\* to make available by default for all accounts in the domain:
* POP access
* IMAP access
* SMTP access
* Webmail access
* Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync
* DAV access
\*Available services vary based on the selected plan.
#### Step 5 - Domain security [#step-5---domain-security]
Restrict access to POP, IMAP, SMTP, and Webmail services for all accounts in the domain only to IP addresses you consider safe and trusted.
You can specify up to 10 IP addresses / IP classes. All connections from IPs not included in the list will not be authorized.
You are not required to enter IP address restrictions.
#### Step 6 - Domain options [#step-6---domain-options]
Set the sensitivity level of the spam filter for all accounts in the domain. We recommend keeping the default value.
Not available for the Basic plan.
### Domain ownership verification [#domain-ownership-verification]
To activate a domain, and therefore create email accounts, alias domains, and email aliases, you must first prove that you own it or are authorized to manage it. Click the domain name in the *Domains* domain list > *Domain name* and select one of the available verification methods:
* Verification via DNS
* Verification via Email\*
* Verification via HTML\*
\*Available only for resellers.
If you have trouble completing the ownership verification procedure, we
recommend contacting our technical support team.
#### Verification via DNS [#verification-via-dns]
When you select verification via DNS, you will be shown a DNS record to create and the IP address it must point to. A different DNS record is generated for each domain, such as: `d458381318.mydomain.it A 185.97.217.16`, made up of 9 random numbers preceded by the letter `d`, the name of the domain being added, and the IP address the record must point to.
Once you have identified the DNS record, go to your domain's DNS management panel and create the corresponding **A record** generated (e.g. `d458381318.mydomain.it`) and point it to the indicated IP address (`185.97.217.16`).
Each DNS management panel works differently: some require only the
alphanumeric code, while others require the full record. We therefore
recommend that you pay attention when performing the operation or request
support from your provider.
To verify that the DNS record was added successfully, check that pinging the generated record returns the IP address indicated by the Panel:
```
$ ping d458381318.esempio.com
PING d458381318.esempio.com (185.97.217.16) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 185.97.217.16: icmp_req=1 ttl=57 time=10 ms
64 bytes from 185.97.217.16: icmp_req=2 ttl=57 time=10 ms
64 bytes from 185.97.217.16: icmp_req=3 ttl=57 time=10 ms
```
If you do not get a response like this, the change to the domain DNS is not correct or is not yet active and you
will not be able to pass the domain ownership verification check.
You may need to wait about 12/24 hours for the DNS record change to become
fully active.
Once the change to the domain DNS is active, you can return to the Control Panel and perform the ownership verification by clicking
the `Verify DNS` button in the yellow banner inside the domain whose ownership you need to verify.
If the verification is successful, the domain will be activated immediately and you can start creating email accounts for the domain.
#### Verification via email [#verification-via-email]
If the domain is already active with another provider, you can verify ownership through an email message containing a confirmation code:
1. Select one of the available email addresses where you want to receive the confirmation code
2. Once you receive the code, enter it in the corresponding field and proceed with the verification
If the verification is successful, the domain will be activated immediately and you can start creating email accounts for the domain.
### Verification via HTML [#verification-via-html]
If the domain has active web space, you can verify ownership by uploading a specific HTML file to your website:
1. Generate the verification HTML file by clicking the `Generate HTML file` button
2. Download the verification file generated by the system by clicking `Download file`
3. Upload the file without changing its name or contents to the main directory of the website associated with the domain (e.g. via FTP)
4. Once the file is uploaded, verify that it is visible at the indicated URL
5. If the file is correctly reachable, you can perform the ownership verification by clicking `Run verification`
If, when clicking the link, you get a 404 error or are redirected to a page on
the website, the file has not been uploaded correctly.
The domain will be activated immediately and you can start creating email accounts for the domain.
Remember that to make the service fully operational and start receiving email
on Qboxmail, you must first update the domain's MX records with those
indicated in the documentation.
### Domain settings [#domain-settings]
To change a domain's settings, click the name of the domain you want to edit in the domain list and select *Settings* from the available tabs.
### Profile [#profile]
Section dedicated to the default information for the domain and the accounts it contains.
#### Company details [#company-details]
Enter the information to use to prefill the relevant fields for new accounts belonging to the domain.
#### Localization [#localization]
Set the default language (Italian or English) and time zone for the domain and for new accounts belonging to it.
### General [#general]
Section dedicated to the settings and limits for the domain and the accounts it contains.
#### Plan [#plan]
Change the plan set for the domain during creation by choosing from the available options: *Basic*, *Professional*, *Enterprise*.
Changing plan involves not only a price change, but also a change in the
features available for the domain. When switching from a higher plan to a
lower one, data that does not match the new plan will be lost.
#### Domain limits [#domain-limits]
Change the default limits for the domain and the accounts belonging to it that were set during creation:
* Maximum total number of email accounts that can be activated.
* Maximum number of 25 GB email accounts that can be activated (among the total).
* Maximum number of Archives that can be activated.
* Default size for new email accounts in the domain.
* Maximum size for email accounts in the domain.
By selecting *Apply the maximum quota retroactively to all accounts*, you can also extend this change to accounts already present within the domain.
#### Sending limits [#sending-limits]
Change the maximum number of email messages that can be sent daily by all accounts belonging to the domain.
[More information](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/caratteristiche/smtp-policy#limiti-di-invio-dagli-smt)
#### Services [#services]
Change the default services available for all accounts belonging to the domain that were set during creation:
* POP access
* IMAP access
* SMTP access
* Webmail access
* Enable DAV (only for Professional and Enterprise plans)
* Synchronization with Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync (only for Enterprise plans)
*Available services vary based on the domain plan.*
#### Catch all [#catch-all]
Set an email address to which messages should be sent if the recipient does not exist.
### Security [#security]
Section dedicated to the security settings for the domain and the accounts it contains.
#### Tracemail log visibility [#tracemail-log-visibility]
Tracemail lets you view logs for up to 30 days; you can limit visibility to 21 days.
* Limit log visibility to 21 days
#### Premium Antimalware [#premium-antimalware]
Enable a higher security level to protect the domain's accounts: a powerful analysis engine that identifies emails containing malware, phishing, and other threats. Available only for Professional and Enterprise plans.
#### Password [#password]
Set the policies for using access passwords for accounts belonging to the domain.
* Force password change at first login.
* Disable password change.
* Disable password recovery.
* Block reuse of old passwords.
* Force password change at next login for all accounts in the domain.
By selecting *Apply password settings retroactively to all accounts*, you can also extend the changes to accounts already present within the domain.
#### Password expiration [#password-expiration]
Set the policies for password expiration for all accounts in the domain.
#### OTP authentication [#otp-authentication]
Set mandatory two-factor authentication (OTP) for accounts belonging to the domain.
#### Antispam level [#antispam-level]
Set the sensitivity level of the spam filter for the domain's accounts. We recommend keeping the default value. Four levels are available and can be set for specific needs:
* Aggressive
* Standard (default)
* Tolerant
* None
We recommend keeping the system default.
#### Custom DKIM signature [#custom-dkim-signature]
Set a custom DKIM signature for the domain. To activate the DKIM signature, follow the procedure described in the [Custom DKIM Signature](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/panel/altro/dkim) section of the documentation for the Control Panel.
#### Enabled IPs [#enabled-ips]
Restrict access to the domain's accounts only to IP addresses you consider safe. You can enter up to 10 IP addresses/classes to apply restrictions for POP, IMAP, SMTP, Webmail, and API services.
#### API access [#api-access]
Allow access to the domain's accounts via API.
### Webmail [#webmail]
#### Default settings for new accounts [#default-settings-for-new-accounts]
Section dedicated to entering the default settings that accounts belonging to that domain must have.
You can choose to set:
* Language
* Time zone
* Date format
* Time format
#### Centralized Email Signature [#centralized-email-signature]
Section dedicated to entering a company signature, which can be quickly applied to all email accounts in the domain.
You can compose a signature by entering plain text or HTML text, and even use variables to dynamically build the signature template for all users.
You can set a domain-level signature only if the domain has a Professional or
Enterprise plan.
To enter a domain-level signature, access the Control Panel:
* *Domains > name of the domain with Professional or Enterprise plan > Settings > Webmail > Centralized email signature*
Enter your company signature with plain text, the company logo, or paste the HTML of a previously created signature directly. You can enter variables that will be populated automatically with the information entered in the [Company profile](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/webmail/rubrica/visualizzazione-gestione-contatti#gestisci-contatti) and in the profile of each individual user.
The variables you can use in the domain signature are:
| Variable | Description |
| ------------------------- | --------------- |
| `{{f_name}}` | First name |
| `{{l_name}}` | Last name |
| `{{company}}` | Company name |
| `{{email}}` | Email address |
| `{{role}}` | Role |
| `{{phone}}` | Company phone |
| `{{mobile}}` | Mobile phone |
| `{{email_secondary}}` | Secondary email |
| `{{country}}` | Country |
| `{{state}}` | State/Province |
| `{{city}}` | City |
| `{{zip}}` | ZIP/Postal code |
| `{{address}}` | Street address |
| `{{fax}}` | Fax |
| `{{organizational_unit}}` | Department |
The symbol indicates that some
users do not have the corresponding field set in their profile.
By clicking
you can view the list of email accounts that are missing the corresponding field in their profile. You can update the domain profile from the domain settings and user profiles from the settings of each individual email account. Once the profiles have been updated, you can continue by reloading the signature with variables.
Once the signature has been entered, you can:
* Enable or disable automatic application of the signature to all new email accounts
and choose whether to:
* Apply the signature only to all accounts that do not already have one
* Apply the signature to all accounts in the domain
Uploading a domain-level signature only affects primary email accounts and not
users' other alias identities.
#### Company Address Book [#company-address-book]
Lets you define whether, by default, when a new email account is created,
it should not be shown in the [Company Address Book](/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/view-and-manage-contacts).
### Disable / reactivate a domain [#disable--reactivate-a-domain]
To **disable** a domain, in the domain list click the More button
next to the domain you want to disable and select *Disable* from the menu.
Disabling a domain prevents all accounts belonging to it from:
* Receiving new email messages.
* Accessing Qboxmail services.
* Being modified.
Messages present within the accounts before disabling will remain available and will be accessible again once the domain is reactivated. If the Archive was active on the accounts, it will remain available.
Disabled domains and all accounts belonging to them are still counted for
billing purposes.
To **reactivate** a domain, in the domain list click the More button
next to the domain you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When the domain is reactivated, the accounts it contains are again enabled to receive email messages and access Qboxmail services.
To disable or reactivate a domain, you must have authorization to perform
these operations.
### Delete a domain [#delete-a-domain]
To **delete** a domain, in the domain list click the More button
next to the domain you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting a domain will permanently delete all settings, accounts, and data it
contains. Deleting a domain is irreversible.
To delete a domain, you must have authorization to perform this operation. If
you have deleted a domain by mistake, contact our technical support team.
# Management roles (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/email-accounts)
An email account (mailbox) is an email address with associated storage space where messages sent and received by that address are saved. Messages inside an email account can be accessed and managed through the POP / IMAP and SMTP protocols, or viewed through the Webmail interface.
An email account must always be linked to a domain, so you must first activate a domain to associate with the email account you want.
### Email account list [#email-account-list]
The email account list includes all email accounts in Qboxmail systems that belong to a specific domain, together with their detailed information.
To view the list of email accounts associated with a domain, click the domain name in the domain list and select *Email account* from the available tabs.
Information shown in the email account list:
* Email account status.
* Email account address.
* Space used by the email account.
* Date and time of the last access to the email account.
* Number of messages sent by the email account in the last 24 hours.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Inactive |
### Add an email account [#add-an-email-account]
To add an email account, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar and open the details of the domain you want to add
the email account to by clicking its name. Select *Email account* from the available tabs, click the `+ Email account` button and
complete the steps in the creation process. Once the process is complete, the email account will be visible in your email account list.
#### Step 1 - New Account [#step-1---new-account]
Enter the details of the user who will use the email account and choose a name for the account you are creating.
1. Enter the name / description of the user who will use the account.
2. Enter the surname of the user who will use the account.
3. Choose an email address for the account.
4. Choose a password to access the account\*. \*You can generate a password automatically and randomly.
If the email account is not personal (e.g. [info@mydomain.com](mailto:info@mydomain.com)), it is enough
to enter a short description in the name field.
#### Step 2 - Services available for the email account [#step-2---services-available-for-the-email-account]
Choose the storage space and which services\* to make available for the email account:
* Space available for the email account.
* POP access.
* IMAP access.
* SMTP access.
* Webmail access.
* Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync.
* DAV access.
\*Available services vary depending on the selected plan.
#### Step 3 - Account security [#step-3---account-security]
Set security policies for accessing the email account you are creating.
* Force password change on first login
* Set user password expiration
* Block reuse of old passwords
* Disable password change
* Disable password recovery
* Force use of two-factor authentication
* Add IP restrictions
* Enable API access
You can restrict access to POP, IMAP, SMTP and Webmail services only to the IP addresses you consider safe and trusted, specifying up to a maximum of 5 IP addresses / classes. All connections from IPs not included in the list will not be authorized.
#### Step 4 - Account options [#step-4---account-options]
Choose whether to add alternative email addresses to which messages received by the email account you are creating will be forwarded, and whether to enable spam message delivery to the Inbox.
To complete the process, click the *Create* button. Once the creation process is complete, the account will be visible in your email account list.
### Email account settings [#email-account-settings]
To change the settings of an email account, click the account name in the email account list you want to edit.
#### Personal details [#personal-details]
Section dedicated to information about the user who uses the email account.
#### Account information [#account-information]
Enter the information of the user who uses the email account\*.
\*Available fields vary depending on the plan selected for the domain.
#### Language and time zone [#language-and-time-zone]
Set the default language (Italian or English) and time zone for the email account.
### General [#general]
Section dedicated to settings and limits related to the email account.
#### Available space [#available-space]
Change the account size set during creation by choosing from the available options.
Available sizes depend on the general limits set for all email accounts belonging to the domain.
#### Daily sending limits [#daily-sending-limits]
Change the maximum number of email messages that can be sent in 24 hours from the email account. [Learn more](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/features/smtp-policy#sending-limits-from-smtp)
Increasing the maximum number of messages that can be sent from an email
account may involve a cost.
#### Services [#services]
Change the services\* available for the email account, set during creation:
* POP access
* IMAP access
* SMTP access
* Webmail access
* Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync
* DAV access
\*Available services vary depending on the domain’s general settings.
#### Forwarding [#forwarding]
Enter up to a maximum of 20 alternative addresses to which messages received by the email account will be forwarded.
#### Other [#other]
Change spam message delivery to Inbox\* and choose whether to reject all messages received by the email account by setting an automatic reply message.
\*Service availability varies depending on the domain’s general settings.
### Security [#security]
Section dedicated to security settings related to the email account.
#### Password [#password]
Set policies for using access passwords for the email account.
* Set a new password for the email account.
* Set mandatory password change every 3, 6 or 12 months.
* Block reuse of old passwords.
* Disable password change.
* Disable password recovery.
* Force password change at the next account login.
#### Password expiration [#password-expiration]
Here you can set password expiration and force logout by disabling services when it expires.
#### OTP authentication [#otp-authentication]
Set mandatory use of two-factor authentication (OTP) for accounts belonging to the domain.
#### Enabled IPs [#enabled-ips]
Restrict access to the email account’s POP, IMAP, SMTP, Webmail and API services only to the IP addresses you consider safe and trusted. You can specify up to a maximum of 5 IP addresses / classes. All connections from IPs not included in the list will not be authorized.
#### API access [#api-access]
Change the ability to access the email account via API.
#### Email sender restrictions [#email-sender-restrictions]
Restrict the sender (From) of email messages to the exact authentication username. This prevents the mailbox owner from sending messages on behalf of other users in the organization.
### Autoresponder [#autoresponder]
Set an automatic reply to all messages received by the email account for the time interval you prefer.
You can define:
* The message subject
* The message text
* A time interval in which to enable the autoresponder
### Webmail [#webmail]
#### Localization [#localization]
Section dedicated to the Webmail localization settings this user will see. The user can then change them independently from the Webmail settings.
You can choose to set:
* Language
* Time zone
* Date format
* Time format
#### Signature and Identity [#signature-and-identity]
In this section you can add, edit or delete a user’s signature for each of their Webmail identities.
To use this feature, the domain must have a Professional or Enterprise plan
By setting custom signatures for the different email account identities, these signatures will be automatically added at the bottom of all new messages.
Identities are automatically created based on the domain’s email alias and
domain alias settings.
For each signature you will find the displayed name, the identity the signature is associated with, and the actions that can be performed for each signature.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| --------------------------- | ------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Default** | Default | Lets you quickly see whether the *Set sender as default* setting is enabled for the signature. |
| **Bcc** | Bcc | Lets you quickly see whether the *Add sender in Bcc* setting is enabled for the signature. |
| | Edit | Edits the signature settings. |
| | Delete | Deletes the signature. |
To add a signature, click `New Signature`, select the identity you want to associate it with, enter the name that will be displayed and the signature body > `Save`. In the signature body you can also insert HTML code, for example a company logo or a link to a website.
Among the settings associated with a signature, you can enable/disable:
* *Set sender as default*, if multiple identities are associated with the email account;
* *Add sender in Bcc* automatically, especially useful when managing mailboxes that have active forwards or in the case of Email Aliases or Domain Aliases.
* *Do not add signature to replies*
If there is only one identity, the section will not be displayed and you will
only need to enter the displayed name and signature.
If you have entered a domain-level signature from the Control Panel, the set
signature will automatically be associated with the main email account.
#### Company Address Book [#company-address-book]
By enabling or disabling the checkbox, you can decide whether this user will or will not appear among the contacts
of the [Company Address Book](/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/view-and-manage-contacts).
### Deactivate / reactivate an email account [#deactivate--reactivate-an-email-account]
To **deactivate** an email account in the email account list, click the More button next to the account you want to deactivate and select *Deactivate* from the menu.
Deactivating an email account prevents the account from:
* Receiving new email messages.
* Accessing Qboxmail services.
* Being modified.
To **reactivate** an email account in the email account list, click the More button next to the account you want to deactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
The disabled email account remains active at the administrative level and is
billed, since disabling blocks access but does not remove the account. To stop
billing, you must delete the email account.
To deactivate or reactivate an email account, you must have permission to
perform these operations.
### Delete an email account [#delete-an-email-account]
To **delete** an email account in the email account list, click the More button next to the account you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
When you delete an email account, all its settings, messages and data contained in it will be lost.
Deleting an email account is irreversible. To delete an email account, you
must have permission to perform this operation. If you have accidentally
deleted an email account, contact our technical support.
# Email alias (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/email-aliases)
An email alias is an email address associated with one or more destination addresses to which messages received by the alias are forwarded.
You can associate up to a maximum of 20 addresses with an email alias, either internal or external to Qboxmail systems.
The name chosen for the email alias cannot be the same as that of an existing
email account.
You can create up to a maximum of 10 alias mailboxes free of charge for each
email mailbox on the domain. If you need to create alias mailboxes with a
ratio higher than 10:1 compared to the email mailboxes on the domain, please
contact us.
### Email alias list [#email-alias-list]
The email alias list contains all email aliases in Qboxmail systems belonging to a specific domain, together with their detailed information.
To view the list of email aliases associated with a domain, click the domain name in the domain list and select *Email alias* from the available tabs.
Information shown in the email alias list:
* Email alias status.
* Email alias address.
* Email alias code.
* Destination addresses associated with the email alias.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Inactive |
### Add an email alias [#add-an-email-alias]
To add an email alias, click *Domains* in the Control Panel sidebar and open the details of the domain you want to associate
the email alias with by clicking its name. Select *Email alias* from the available tabs, click the *+ Email alias* button, and fill in the required fields:
1. Enter the name of the email alias you want to create.
2. Enter one or more addresses to which messages received by the email alias should be forwarded by clicking the *Add* button.
You can associate up to a maximum of 20 addresses with each email alias.
To complete the procedure and activate the email alias, click the `Create` button.
### Edit an email alias [#edit-an-email-alias]
To add or remove a forwarding address associated with an email alias, click the email name in the email alias list that you want to edit.
### Delete an email alias [#delete-an-email-alias]
To **delete** an email alias from the email alias list, click the More button
next to the alias you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
By deleting an email account, all its settings, messages, and data contained in it will be lost.
To delete an email alias, you must have permission to perform these
operations. If you have accidentally deleted one, contact our technical
support.
# Imports (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/imports)
**What are imports?**
An import is the operation that lets you automatically create, within Qboxmail systems, a list of domains and/or email accounts in bulk through a specifically formatted CSV file, making the process of adding a large number of domains and/or accounts simpler and faster.
**Who can perform an import?**
Imports can be performed by an Admin, a Team member, or a Manager authorized to manage domains.
**What can be imported?**
You can import domains, email accounts, domain aliases, email aliases, and their respective passwords. Each CSV file can contain up to 250 items.
You need to prepare one CSV file for each type of import.
### Create a CSV file for an import [#create-a-csv-file-for-an-import]
To perform an import, you need to create a specific CSV file by following the specifications provided in the `0-ITA-LEGGIMI-IMPORTAZIONI.txt`
file included in [Imports.zip](https://www.qboxmail.com/download/Imports.zip).
You can choose between a **basic** and an **advanced** import. Basic import lets you create Domains and Email Accounts
by specifying only the name and password. Advanced import lets you specify additional fields in the CSV.
You can enter a maximum of 250 rows in the CSV file.
The field separator is ; (semicolon). You can also use a text delimiter if the password
contains a special character or the field separator itself. The text delimiter is " (quotation marks). See the
*importazioni-delimitatori.txt* file.
#### Import with password hashes [#import-with-password-hashes]
You can also specify a Hash in the password field of the CSV if you do not have the current password available. Hashes represent
passwords in encrypted format, which is usually how they are stored in databases. Currently, you can enter these hash formats in the CSV:
* MD5-CRYPT
* SHA512-CRYPT
In this case, the password field must contain the name of the password scheme used enclosed in curly brackets.
* Example: `{SHA512-CRYPT}$6$xVM3rIc...`
You can also import many other types of Hashes. If the one available to you is not among those supported by CSV import,
contact our technical support.
The complete list of supported hashes is shown below:
* BLF-CRYPT
* SHA512-CRYPT
* SHA256-CRYPT
* MD5-CRYPT
* CRYPT
* PLAIN-MD5
* SHA
* SSHA
* SHA256
* SSHA256
* SHA512
* SSHA512
* SSHA256.hex
* SSHA512.hex
### CSV files for basic imports [#csv-files-for-basic-imports]
To perform a **basic import**, you need to create a CSV file where each object to import is defined by fields, separated by the field separator ; (semicolon) and, if they contain a semicolon, enclosed by a text separator " (double quote).
Basic mode is the default when running an Import.
**Format for basic email account Import:**
* 2 columns
* `Email Account(required);Password(required)`
**Format for basic domain Import:**
* 2 columns
* `Domain(required);Postmaster password(required)`
**Format for domain alias Import:**
* 2 columns
* `Real domain(required);Domain Alias(required)`
**Format for email alias Import:**
* 2 columns
* `Email Alias(required);Recipients(required, max 20 separated by comma)`
When you select Basic mode, the CSV file must contain only the required
fields.
#### CSV files for advanced imports [#csv-files-for-advanced-imports]
For domain and email account imports, an **advanced** mode is available and can be selected when uploading the CSV file from the control panel. Advanced mode requires that optional CSV fields/columns are also present, even if empty. Therefore, in the CSV, when "advanced" mode is selected, the comma-separated fields must be present even if they are empty.
**Format for advanced email account Import**
* 5 columns
* `Email Account(required);Password (required);First name(optional);Last name(optional);Forward(optional, max 20 separated by comma)`
**Format for advanced domain Import**
* 3 columns
* `Domain(required);Postmaster password(required);Manager codes(optional)`
## Run an import [#run-an-import]
To run an import, click *Imports* in the control panel sidebar, then click the `+ Import` button and complete the steps in the creation wizard. Once the procedure is complete, the import will be visible in your imports list.
* *Imports* > *+ Import*
1. Select the type of import you want to run.
2. Upload the CSV file you previously prepared.
To import email accounts, domain aliases, or email aliases, the domain they
belong to must already exist.
To complete the procedure, click the `Import` button. Once the import addition procedure is complete, it will be visible in your imports list.
### Imports list [#imports-list]
The imports list contains all imports added to Qboxmail systems belonging to an Admin, with their detailed information. To view the imports list, click *Imports* in the control panel sidebar.
Information shown in the imports list:
* Import status.
* Name of the user who requested the import.
* Import code.
* Import type.
* Resources included in the import.
* Any errors in the import procedure.
* Date and time of the import or import attempt.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | -------------- |
|
| Validating |
|
| Valid import |
|
| Invalid import |
### Delete an import [#delete-an-import]
To **delete** an import from the imports list, click the Trash button
next to the import, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting an import that has already taken place deletes only the import record. If the import has already been completed successfully, the imported domains and accounts will not be deleted. If the import was only scheduled, deleting the record also deletes all the scheduling that had already been prepared.
Imports older than 30 days are automatically deleted.
For more details about [imports and
migrations](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/importazioni-migrazioni/)
visit the Qboxmail website.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/introduction)
The Control Panel is the management software for [Qboxmail](https://www.qboxmail.it), accessible via the web from desktop, smartphone, and tablet,
which allows you to manage company email accounts independently.
The application allows you to manage users and services through multi-role access based on permissions and limits defined
by the administrator, and to monitor activities through dedicated analysis and reporting tools.
# Management roles (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/management-roles)
The Qboxmail Control Panel lets you manage business domains and email accounts through multi-level roles. You can assign these roles to collaborators or customers and set specific limits for each role.
We recommend creating and using a named role for each collaborator or customer
so that you can track their actions clearly.
### Admin (administrator) [#admin-administrator]
The Admin manages the Control Panel and its connected services. This is the person who purchases the service directly from Qboxmail. Admins can add and manage domains and accounts independently, within the limits of the selected billing type and plans, and have full control over all resources in their profile.
The Admin can create and assign other management roles, such as Team member, Manager, or Postmaster, and set role-specific limits based on what the plan allows.
To change the settings, after logging in to the panel, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### Team member (collaborator) [#team-member-collaborator]
A Team member is an Admin collaborator who can access all domains and accounts within the limits set by the Admin.
The Team member can be created, activated, or deactivated only by their Admin.
Limits available for the Team member:
* Add, edit, delete domains
* Add, edit, delete email accounts
* Add, edit, delete archive
* Change account password
* Access to Email log analysis
* Access to the Log
* API access
* Add, edit, delete Managers (only if the Admin is a reseller)
To change the settings, after logging in to the panel, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### Manager (company manager) [#manager-company-manager]
A Manager is responsible for managing specific domains and their associated accounts. Only an Admin with reseller status can create, activate, or deactivate a Manager. An authorized Team member can also do this.
Limits available for the Manager:
* List of assigned domains
* Maximum number of domains that can be activated
* Maximum number of email accounts (8 GB and 25 GB) that can be activated
* Maximum number of Archives that can be activated
To change the settings, after logging in to the panel, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### Postmaster (domain manager) [#postmaster-domain-manager]
A Postmaster is responsible for a single domain and can independently create and manage its associated accounts within the domain limits. A Postmaster is created automatically with each new domain, and its account has a fixed available space of 50 MB.
The Postmaster accesses the Control Panel with:
* Username: postmaster\@DOMINIO
* Password: password chosen when creating the domain
To change the settings, after logging in to the panel, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### Email account (user) [#email-account-user]
An Email account belongs to an individual email address and can manage only its own settings, such as changing the password, enabling OTP access, and setting an autoresponder.
To change the settings, after logging in to the panel, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### Delegate (auditor) [#delegate-auditor]
A Delegate is a user authorized to access the Archive of one or more email accounts within specific limits. Delegates can view part or all of the archive content to support internal audits or company protection processes. All Delegate activity is tracked in a dedicated activity log (AuditLog).
# Manager (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/manager)
**Who is the Manager?**
A Manager is responsible for managing selected company resources.
**Who can create a Manager?**
Only an Admin with reseller status can create, activate, or deactivate a Manager. An authorized Team member can also do this.
**What can a Manager do?**
A Manager can manage specific domains and their associated accounts.
### Manager list [#manager-list]
The Manager list shows all Managers associated with an Admin in Qboxmail, along with their details.
To view the manager list, click *Multi-level* and then *Manager* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the manager list:
* Manager status.
* Manager name.
* Manager code.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Inactive |
### Add a manager [#add-a-manager]
To add a Manager, click *Multi-level* and then *Manager* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the `+ Manager` button, and complete the creation steps. Once complete, the Manager will be visible in your Manager list.
#### New manager [#new-manager]
Enter the user's details, assign the domains they can manage, and set the related limits.
1. Enter the user's first name.
2. Enter the user's last name.
3. Enter the user's company name.
4. Enter the user's email address.
5. Choose a password to access the account (you can generate a random password automatically).
6. Set the maximum number of domains the manager can activate.
7. Set the maximum total number of 8 GB and 25 GB accounts the manager can activate.
8. Set the maximum total number of archives the manager can activate.
9. Select the domains the manager will be able to manage.
To complete the procedure, click the `Create` button. Once the Manager has been created, they will be visible in your Manager list.
### Manager settings [#manager-settings]
To edit a manager’s settings, click the name of the manager you want to edit in the manager list.
#### General [#general]
Settings and limits for the Manager’s service management.
### Security [#security]
Change the Manager’s Control Panel password.
### Deactivate / reactivate a manager [#deactivate--reactivate-a-manager]
To **deactivate** a manager, in the manager list click the More button next to the manager you want to deactivate and select *Deactivate* from the menu.
When you deactivate a Manager, they can no longer access the Control Panel or manage the domains and accounts assigned to them.
To **reactivate** a manager, in the manager list click the More button next to the manager you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When you reactivate a Manager, they can access the Control Panel again and continue managing the domains and accounts assigned to them.
### Delete a manager [#delete-a-manager]
To **delete** a manager, in the manager list click the More button next to the manager you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting a manager will delete the corresponding account and the authorizations assigned to it, but any domains and accounts created by that manager will not be deleted.
Deleting a manager is irreversible.
# Migrations (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/migrations)
**What are migrations?**
A migration is the operation that lets you transfer the content of one or more email accounts from a mail server to Qboxmail systems in bulk through a specially configured CSV file, making the message transfer procedure simpler and faster.
Migrations transfer all messages from the old server to Qboxmail and replicate the entire folder and subfolder tree.
**Who can perform a migration?**
Migrations can be performed by an Admin, a Team member, or a Manager authorized to manage domains.
**What is needed to perform a migration?**
To perform a migration, the source mail server must allow access to messages via IMAP, and you must prepare a specially configured CSV file.
### Create a CSV file for a migration [#create-a-csv-file-for-a-migration]
To perform a migration, you need to create a dedicated CSV file specifying the usernames and passwords for the email accounts on the old server that you want to migrate.
You can add a maximum of 500 rows to the CSV file. Each customer can schedule
a maximum of 5 migrations at the same time.
If you know the passwords of the email accounts you want to migrate, you can perform a standard migration.
If you do not know the users' passwords and your server supports IMAP Master User, you can transfer the content of the email accounts without knowing their password. In this case, you must create a CSV file by following the instructions for migration with Master User.
If you do not know the account passwords and your remote server does not
provide the Master User feature, contact our technical support.
#### CSV file for a standard migration [#csv-file-for-a-standard-migration]
To perform a standard migration, you must create a CSV file where each email account to import is defined by 4 fields, separated by the field separator `;` (semicolon) and, if they contain a semicolon, enclosed by a text separator `”` (double quote).
You must always specify the hostname or IP address of the remote IMAP server that Qboxmail systems will connect to in order to download messages.
Follow the specifications in the `0-ITA-LEGGIMI-MIGRAZIONI.txt` file inside the [Migrations.zip](https://www.qboxmail.com/download/Migrations.zip) file.
We recommend always specifying an IP address, because the hostname may change
after DNS changes.
| | |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **email\@locale** | Destination email account on Qboxmail systems |
| **imap-server-remoto** | Name of the IMAP server to connect to in order to download messages |
| **email\@remota** | Remote email account from which to retrieve messages |
| **pwdremota** | Password of the remote mailbox from which to retrieve messages |
`email@locale;imap-server-remoto;email@remota;pwdremota`
If the remote server requires **a username different from the email address**, you can specify it in the CSV instead of the "email\@remota" field.
Once the CSV file has been generated, we recommend always opening it with a
text editor (e.g. Notepad) to verify that it is correct.
#### CSV file for a migration with Master User [#csv-file-for-a-migration-with-master-user]
Migration with Master User lets you transfer the content of email accounts without knowing their password. To perform a migration with Master User, you must create a CSV file where each email account to import is defined by 5 fields, separated by the field separator `;` (semicolon) and, if they contain a semicolon, enclosed by a text separator `”` (double quote).
You must always specify the hostname or IP address of the remote IMAP server that Qboxmail systems will connect to in order to download messages.
Follow the specifications in the `0-ITA-LEGGIMI-MIGRAZIONI.txt` file inside the [Migrations.zip](https://www.qboxmail.com/download/Migrations.zip) file.
We recommend always specifying an IP address, because the hostname may change
after DNS changes.
| | |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **email\@locale** | Destination email account on Qboxmail systems |
| **imap-server-remoto** | Name of the IMAP server to connect to in order to download messages |
| **email\@remota** | Remote email account from which to retrieve messages |
| **pwd-master-user** | Password of the remote master user |
| **master-user-name** | Name of the remote master user |
`email@locale;imap-server-remoto;email@remota;pwd-master-user;master-user-name`
If the remote server requires **a username different from the email address**, you can specify it in the CSV instead of the "email\@remota" field.
Once the CSV file has been generated, we recommend always opening it with a
text editor (e.g. Notepad) to verify that it is correct.
### Run a migration [#run-a-migration]
To run a migration, click *Migrations* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the `+ Migration` button, and complete the scheduling procedure steps.
1. Select the type of remote server to migrate messages from (Standard, Gmail, Exchange, Office 365)> Access and IMAP settings vary between different providers and servers.
2. Upload the CSV file you previously prepared.
3. Set the date and time when the first migration should start.
4. When the first run is complete, you will receive a confirmation email so you can change the MX records.> We recommend changing the MX records at the end of the first run so that the second run can transfer the remaining email messages that arrived on the old server in the meantime.
5. Choose when to run the second migration (no more than 23 hours after the first).
You can set a date and time when the migration will start, or choose to run the migration immediately with the **Run first migration as soon as possible** option.
Messages in the following folders will not be migrated: Trash, Cestino, Spam,
Posta indesiderata, Junk Email, and individual messages larger than 50 MB.
To complete the procedure, click the `Migrate` button. Once the scheduling procedure is complete, the migration will be visible in your migration list.
If the migration has been **scheduled successfully**, it will run at the scheduled time and you will receive a notification email when it is complete.
**In case of errors**, before scheduling a new migration, Qboxmail systems will connect to the IMAP server specified in the CSV file to attempt authentication. If authentication fails, an error message will appear and you will need to check for any issues with the accounts or with the remote server.
Migration errors are generally caused by an incorrect username or password,
lack of IMAP protocol support by the remote server, or an incorrect IP address
for the remote server.
Open the migration resource list to view the logs for each account for both runs.
### Migration list [#migration-list]
The migration list contains all migrations added to Qboxmail systems belonging to an Admin, with their detailed information. To view the migration list, click *Migrations* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the migration list:
* Migration status.
* Name of the user who requested the migration.
* Migration code.
* Migration type.
* Number of resources to migrate.
* Scheduled date of the first migration.
* Scheduled date of the second migration.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------------- |
|
| Validating |
|
| Valid migration |
|
| Invalid migration |
By accessing the migration resource list, you can view all details of the accounts in the migration CSV file and their related outcomes or errors.
### Delete a migration [#delete-a-migration]
To **delete** a migration from the migration list, click the Trash button next to the migration, then confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
You cannot delete a migration in progress. Contact our technical support for
more information.
Migrations older than 30 days are deleted automatically.
### When to change MX records [#when-to-change-mx-records]
By scheduling migrations at least 4/8 hours apart, you will have time to change your domain's MX records and prevent messages received by the accounts during the first migration from being lost.
At the end of the first migration, Qboxmail systems will send you a notification email so you can change the MX records and direct the accounts to Qboxmail servers. This way, when the second migration runs, it can retrieve the messages on the old server that were received during the procedure.
### Migrate from MS365 [#migrate-from-ms365]
This procedure applies to MS365 accounts protected with OAuth2
authentication.
To migrate from MS365, you need to [create an App Registration](https://www.qboxmail.it/download/guida_oauth.pdf). You can then contact our technical support and provide the CSV file, to which you will have added two additional fields:
| | |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **client\_ID** | 'Application (client) ID' related to the App Registration created |
| **client\_secret** | the value of the 'client secret' |
The CSV file will therefore have the following form:
`email@locale;imap-server-remoto;email@remota;pwdremota;client_ID;client_secret`
# Orders (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/orders)
By filling out the registration form on the [Free trial](https://www.qboxmail.it/prova-qboxmail/) page, you can try Qboxmail services free of charge for 30 days. Within this period, if you want to continue using the services, you must complete the purchase process by clicking *Buy the service* in the Control Panel sidebar and completing the order procedure.
### Step 1 - Geographic Area [#step-1---geographic-area]
Select the country where your company is based or where you reside.
### Step 2 - User type [#step-2---user-type]
Select the user type that best matches your profile.
| | |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Individual** | User with an Italian tax code but no VAT number. (Only for residents in Italy) |
| **Company** | Freelancer or company with a VAT number. |
| **Reseller** | Freelancer or company with a VAT number that purchases the service to resell it to third parties. |
### Step 3 - Contact information [#step-3---contact-information]
Enter the details of the company or user that intends to purchase the services.
1. Enter the name of the company that intends to purchase the services.
2. Enter the first name of the company contact person or legal representative.
3. Enter the last name of the company contact person or legal representative.
4. Enter the VAT number of the company that intends to purchase the services.
5. Enter the tax code of the company that intends to purchase the services (if different from the VAT number).
6. Enter the company’s recipient code for electronic invoicing.
7. Enter the address of the company that intends to purchase the service.
8. Enter the phone number of the company that intends to purchase the service.
The available fields vary depending on the user type selected in the previous
step.
### Step 4 - Billing and payment methods [#step-4---billing-and-payment-methods]
Select the [billing type](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/billing/billing) and [payment method](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/billing/payment-methods) that best suit your needs.
#### Payment frequency [#payment-frequency]
Select the payment frequency for Qboxmail services, choosing between the flexibility of a monthly fee or the stability of an annual one.
All payments, both monthly and annual, are made in advance.
| Billing | |
| ----------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Annual** | Allows you to activate a fixed number of domains and email accounts, calculating the fee annually. In the next step, you must indicate the domains you want to add to Qboxmail systems and the related email accounts. |
| **Monthly** | Allows you to activate an unlimited number of domains and email accounts, adjusting the fee monthly. In the next step, you will not need to specify the number of domains and accounts you intend to purchase, but you can add all the domains you need once the purchase has been completed. |
Annual billing is not available for resellers.
#### Payment method [#payment-method]
Select the payment method.
| Payment method | |
| ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **PayPal with automatic debit** | Allows you to set up automatic invoice payments through your PayPal account, so you no longer need to worry about due dates. |
| **PayPal or Credit Card** | Allows you to make the payment using your PayPal account or your credit card. |
| **Bank transfer** | Allows you to make the payment by bank transfer, following the instructions you will receive by email at the end of the procedure. |
If you select PayPal (with automatic debit or with account / credit card) as
the payment method, after you have made the payment and once the system has
completed its checks, you can immediately start managing your domains. If you
select Bank transfer, your domains will be available after we receive the
credited amount.
#### Billing area [#billing-area]
Set the login credentials for the billing area. Unless otherwise specified, the system will use, by default, the same username and password that you use to access the Control Panel.
If you want to set different credentials, select *Use different credentials to access the billing area* and enter an email address and a password.
All invoices will be sent to the email address indicated as the username for
the billing area.
### Step 5 - Domains and email accounts [#step-5---domains-and-email-accounts]
Enter the domain names and the number of email accounts you intend to purchase for each domain. If you already added domains and email accounts during the trial period, they will automatically be listed among the domains available for purchase.
If you previously selected monthly payment frequency, only the domains and number of accounts currently present in Qboxmail systems will be shown and, once the order is completed, you can add all the domains and accounts you want.
With an annual payment method, the minimum number of email accounts that can
be activated is 1. With a monthly payment method, the minimum number of email
accounts that can be activated is 5. In both cases, if a certain number of
mailboxes was activated during the free trial, it will not be possible to
activate the service for fewer mailboxes than the number chosen during the
free trial (for example, if you activated 8 mailboxes during the free trial,
it will not be possible to activate fewer than 8 when you purchase the
service).{" "}
### Step 6 - Order summary [#step-6---order-summary]
After checking that all information is correct and accepting the terms of service, complete the order procedure by clicking the *Order* button.
To start using all Qboxmail services included in the plan you selected, you
must have made the payment using the selected method and wait for any limits
identified during the trial phase to be removed.
# Settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/panel-settings)
Panel settings let you manage the configurations related to the interface and the user account used to access the panel.
To edit the settings, click *Settings* at the bottom left of the sidebar.
### General [#general]
#### Language and time zone [#language-and-time-zone]
Lets you choose the language (English or Italian) and the reference time zone for the Control Panel interface.
#### Password [#password]
Lets you change the password used to access the Control Panel, including by generating it automatically and randomly.
#### Remembered devices [#remembered-devices]
Browsers and devices that complete OTP are remembered for 30 days, so a new OTP code is not requested during that period. If a device is removed from the list, OTP will be requested again at the next login only when OTP authentication is enabled.
#### OTP authentication [#otp-authentication]
Lets you enable / disable two-factor authentication (OTP) as an additional security measure for accessing the Control Panel. To use OTP, you need to install the Google Authenticator app on your smartphone, or any other two-factor authentication app available on Google Play or the Apple Store.
#### Allowed IPs [#allowed-ips]
Lets you restrict access to the Control Panel only to specific IP addresses considered valid and trusted.
#### Tracemail Log visibility for new domains [#tracemail-log-visibility-for-new-domains]
Tracemail lets you view logs for up to 30 days; you can limit visibility to 21 days for all new domains.
#### API access [#api-access]
Lets you enable / disable management of Control Panel features through APIs. To use this configuration, you need to generate a validation token.
### Limits [#limits]
This section shows the limits of your account and the maximum number of email accounts and archives you can activate.
-1 indicates that you can activate an unlimited number of email accounts and
archives.
### Notifications [#notifications]
In this section, you can set up HTTP or email notifications for specific events.
#### Webhook [#webhook]
Lets you specify a URL where an HTTP call is received when:
* The space used by an email account is about to run out or when it returns below a preset threshold;
* A new domain is created.
For more details on using Webhooks, see the Qboxmail API Documentation.
#### Email notifications [#email-notifications]
Lets you specify an email address where you receive a warning message when the space used by an email account is about to run out and when it returns below a preset threshold.
# Postmaster (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/postmaster)
**Who is the Postmaster?**
The Postmaster is responsible for an individual domain.
**How is a Postmaster created?**
A Postmaster is created automatically with each new domain, and its account has 50 MB of fixed available space.
**What can a Postmaster do?**
A Postmaster can manage its domain and associated accounts within the assigned limits.
### Postmaster list [#postmaster-list]
The Postmaster list shows all Postmasters associated with an Admin in Qboxmail, along with their details. To view the Postmaster list, click *Multi-level* and then *Postmaster* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the postmaster list:
* Postmaster status.
* Name of the domain the postmaster belongs to.
* Postmaster email address
* Space used by the postmaster account.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Inactive |
### Postmaster settings [#postmaster-settings]
To edit a postmaster’s settings, click the postmaster address in the postmaster list that you want to modify.
### Personal details [#personal-details]
This section contains information about the user assigned to the Postmaster account.
#### Account information [#account-information]
Enter the details of the user assigned to the Postmaster account. The available fields vary depending on the plan selected for the domain.
#### Language and time zone [#language-and-time-zone]
Set the default language (Italian or English) and time zone for the postmaster.
### General [#general]
Settings and limits for the Postmaster account.
#### Sending limits [#sending-limits]
Change the maximum number of email messages that can be sent daily by the postmaster.
Increasing the maximum number of messages that can be sent by an email account
increases the cost.
#### Services [#services]
Modify the services\* available for the postmaster, set during creation:
* POP access
* IMAP access
* SMTP access
* Webmail access
* Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync
* DAV access
\*The available services vary depending on the domain’s general settings.
#### Forwarding [#forwarding]
Enter up to a maximum of 20 alternative addresses to which messages received by the postmaster should be forwarded.
#### Other [#other]
Modify the delivery of spam messages to the Inbox\* and choose whether to reject all messages received by the postmaster by setting an automatic reply message.
\*Service availability varies depending on the domain’s general settings.
### Security [#security]
Security settings for the Postmaster account.
#### Password [#password]
Set the policies related to the use of access passwords for the postmaster.
* Set a new password for the postmaster.
* Require a mandatory password change every 3, 6, or 12 months.
* Block reuse of old passwords.
* Disable password change.
* Disable password recovery.
* Force password change at the next account login.
#### OTP authentication [#otp-authentication]
Require the use of two-factor authentication (OTP) for the postmaster.
#### Allowed IPs [#allowed-ips]
Restrict access to the postmaster’s POP, IMAP, SMTP, Webmail, and API services only to the IP addresses you consider secure and trusted. You can specify up to 10 IP addresses / classes; all connections from IPs not included in the list will not be authorized.
#### API access [#api-access]
Choose whether the Postmaster can access the API.
#### Email sender restrictions [#email-sender-restrictions]
Restrict the sender (From) of email messages to the exact authentication username.
This prevents the mailbox owner from sending messages on behalf of other users in the organization.
### Autoresponder [#autoresponder]
Set an automatic reply to all messages received by the postmaster for the time interval you prefer.
### Webmail [#webmail]
#### Localization [#localization]
Define the Webmail localization settings this user will see. The user can then change them independently from the Webmail settings.
#### Signature and identity [#signature-and-identity]
Manage identities connected to the primary email address and email aliases associated with the user.
You can customize the display name and signature for each email address.
This information lets the user send messages with names and email addresses different from their own.
#### Company Address Book [#company-address-book]
Choose whether this user should be hidden from the Company Address Book.
# Reports (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/report)
In the Reports section, you can download detailed reports for your domains and accounts in real time, in CSV format. This provides a collection of useful data to monitor your account performance or to perform calculations and checks for billing your customers.
### Download a report [#download-a-report]
Log in to the Control Panel and go to the *Reports* section:
* Choose which report you want to download > click the `Download report` button
Reports are generated in standard CSV format, so they can be easily viewed and analyzed according to your needs with any spreadsheet program (Microsoft Excel, Numbers, Calc, etc.). You can then apply filters to the CSV files or process them through your own management and billing applications.
| Report | Description |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Domains** | Details of all domains within an account. |
| **Domain Aliases** | Details of all domain aliases within an account. |
| **Domain Limits** | Details of the limits set on the domains within an account. |
| **Email Account** | Details of all email accounts within an account. |
| **Email Alias** | Details of all email aliases within an account. |
| **Email Archive** | Details of all email archives within an account. |
Domain Reports also include the Manager, if any, assigned to a specific
domain.
Reports are only available to the administrator account of your panel. Team
Members and Managers cannot access Reports.
### Reports and billing [#reports-and-billing]
Reports extract Control Panel data in real time, and this data may not perfectly match what is actually billed. Differences between what is shown in Reports and what is counted in the [invoice](https://docs.qboxmail.com/en/billing/billing) can depend on several factors:
* A domain without email accounts is billed as one 8 GB mailbox on the Basic plan. If billed, this mailbox is indicated with a *Yes* in the *Postmaster* field within the *Domain report*.
* Reports extract data from the panel in real time, so if they are generated on a day or at a time that does not match the billing calculation, there may be differences.
* Pricing plans include minimum numbers of billable mailboxes and, if these numbers are not reached, the system still bills the minimum number of mailboxes required.
* For billing purposes, mailboxes are 8 GB, 25 GB, 50 GB, and 100 GB, with no intermediate sizes.
# Team member (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/team-member)
**Who is the Team member?**
A Team member is an Admin collaborator, usually an internal company user.
**Who can create a Team member?**
Only the Admin can create a Team member.
**What can a Team member do?**
A Team member can manage all domains and accounts within the limits set by the Admin.
### Team member list [#team-member-list]
The Team member list shows all Team members associated with an Admin in Qboxmail, along with their details.
To view the team member list, click *Multi-level* and then *Team* in the Control Panel sidebar.
Information shown in the team member list:
* Team member status.
* Team member name.
* Team member code.
| Status | Description |
| ------------------------------------------ | ----------- |
|
| Updating |
|
| Active |
|
| Disabled |
### Add a Team member [#add-a-team-member]
To add a Team member, click *Multi-level* and then *Team* in the Control Panel sidebar, click the `+ Team member` button, and complete the creation steps. Once complete, the Team member will be visible in your Team member list.
#### Step 1 - New Team member [#step-1---new-team-member]
Enter the user's details.
1. Enter the user's first name.
2. Enter the user's last name.
3. Enter the user's email address.
4. Choose a password to access the account\*.
\*You can generate a random password automatically.
#### Step 2 - Domain management [#step-2---domain-management]
Set the domain management permissions for the Team member.
1. Authorize the team member to view domains.
2. Authorize the team member to create new domains.
3. Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate domains.
4. Authorize the team member to delete domains.
5. Authorize the team member to manage managers.
#### Step 3 - Account management [#step-3---account-management]
Set the account management permissions for the Team member.
1. Authorize the team member to edit accounts.
2. Authorize the team member to create new accounts.
3. Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate accounts.
4. Authorize the team member to delete accounts.
5. Authorize the team member to change account passwords.
### Step 4 - Archive management [#step-4---archive-management]
Set the archive management permissions for the Team member.
1. Authorize the team member to view archives.
2. Authorize the team member to activate new archives.
3. Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate archives.
4. Authorize the team member to delete archives.
5. Authorize the team member to manage delegates.
#### Step 5 - Analytics and security tools [#step-5---analytics-and-security-tools]
Set the analytics tool permissions for the Team member.
1. Authorize the team member to view Tracemail.
2. Authorize the team member to view the Log.
3. Authorize API access for the Team member.
To complete the procedure, click the `Create` button. Once the Team member has been created, they will be visible in your Team member list.
### Team member settings [#team-member-settings]
To edit a team member’s settings, click the name of the team member you want to edit in the team member list.
#### General [#general]
Settings and limits for the Team member’s service management.
#### Domain management [#domain-management]
Set domain management permissions for the team member.
* Authorize the team member to view domains.
* Authorize the team member to create new domains.
* Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate domains.
* Authorize the team member to delete domains.
* Authorize the team member to manage managers.
#### Account management [#account-management]
Set account management permissions for the team member.
* Authorize the team member to edit accounts.
* Authorize the team member to create new accounts.
* Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate accounts.
* Authorize the team member to delete accounts.
* Authorize the team member to change account passwords.
#### Archive management [#archive-management]
Set archive management permissions for the team member.
* Authorize the team member to view archives.
* Authorize the team member to activate new archives.
* Authorize the team member to disable / reactivate archives.
* Authorize the team member to delete archives.
* Authorize the team member to manage delegates.
#### Analytics tools [#analytics-tools]
Set access to analytics tools for the team member.
* Authorize the team member to view Tracemail.
* Authorize the team member to view the Log.
#### API access [#api-access]
Authorize API access for the Team member.
#### Security [#security]
Change the team member’s Control Panel access password.
### Disable / reactivate a Team member [#disable--reactivate-a-team-member]
To **disable** a team member, in the team member list click the More button next to the team member you want to disable and select *Disable* from the menu.
When you disable a Team member, they can no longer access the Control Panel or manage the domains and accounts assigned to them.
To **reactivate** a team member, in the team member list click the More button next to the team member you want to reactivate and select *Reactivate* from the menu.
When you reactivate a Team member, they can access the Control Panel again and continue managing the domains and accounts assigned to them.
### Delete a Team member [#delete-a-team-member]
To **delete** a team member, in the team member list click the More button next to the team member you want to delete and select *Delete* from the menu, confirming the operation by clicking the `Delete` button in the modal.
Deleting a team member will delete the corresponding account and the permissions assigned to it, but any managers, domains, and accounts created by that team member will not be deleted.
Deleting a team member is irreversible.
# Tracemail (/en/guides/email-hosting/control-panel/tracemail)
Tracemail lets you analyze, in real time, the logs for incoming email traffic (Received Mail), outgoing email traffic (Sent Mail), and access to POP, IMAP, and Webmail services, so you can identify any issues related to a specific email account.
Tracemail keeps a history of up to 30 days.
To view logs:
1. Click *Tracemail* in the Control Panel sidebar.
2. Select the type of action you want to view.
3. Enter the name of the domain whose logs you want to view.
4. Enter the name of an email account whose logs you want to view.
5. Specify the date for which you want to view the logs.
Once the fields are filled in, any search results will appear. For each result, you can see the outcome, the date/time of the event, and other useful information for analyzing the data found.
You can export the details of each search result in PDF format, or the overall
summary of all results in CSV format.
### Accesses [#accesses]
By selecting **accesses** in the Action field, user logins and logouts within POP, IMAP, and Webmail services are shown. Accesses are divided into “*Successful*” and “*Failed*”. At logout, for POP and IMAP sessions, the amount of traffic generated, the number of messages deleted during the session, and the email client used by the user to connect to the service are recorded.
The details shown by Tracemail in the accesses section are as follows:
| **Action** | Type of action recorded (e.g. login, logout) |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Login** | Date and time when the action occurred (e.g. 27/8/2019, 12:51:36) |
| **Logout** | Date and time when the action occurred (e.g. 27/8/2019, 12:51:36) |
| **User** | Username of the user who performed the action (e.g. [mario.rossi@qboxmail.it](mailto:mario.rossi@qboxmail.it)) |
| **Protocol** | Access protocol used to connect to Qboxmail systems (e.g. IMAP) |
| **Deleted msgs** | Number of messages deleted during the session |
| **Expunged msgs** | Number of messages removed during the session |
| **Trashed msgs** | Number of messages moved to the trash during the session |
| **Client** | Email client used by the user (e.g. Microsoft Outlook 2016) |
| **Server** | Qboxmail server on which the action takes place (e.g. pop06) |
| **Local IP** | IP address of the Qboxmail server on which the action takes place (e.g. 185.97.217.80) |
| **Session** | Unique ID of the session on which the action takes place (e.g. imlxDheRE95bj8Qu) |
| **Remote IP** | IP address of the server from which the user connected (e.g. 81.123.176.56) |
| **In traffic** | Incoming traffic generated by the session |
| **Out traffic** | Outgoing traffic generated by the session |
#### Failed accesses [#failed-accesses]
For failed accesses, the reason is recorded (e.g. incorrect password, disabled user, unauthorized IP, invalid OTP). In the event of a failed access, the cause is shown under *Login error*:
| | |
| -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **auth-failed** | The password entered is incorrect |
| **many-connections** | The user has exceeded the maximum number of allowed connections |
| **ip-notallowed** | The user is trying to access from an IP address not included among the authorized ones |
| **user-disabled** | The user or the entire domain is disabled |
Failed connection errors, timeouts, or attempts made with an incorrect username
are not included in the access list.
### Received mail [#received-mail]
By selecting **received mail**, you can view all email received by a specific domain. Received email is divided into: *accepted*, *quarantined*, *rejected*.
For each result, various information is shown, including the message delivery status (deliveries), the folder where it was delivered, whether it was forwarded to another email address, whether the automatic reply was sent, or whether a message filtering rule was applied. The results of the Antivirus and Antispam tests are also provided.
For rejected or quarantined messages, you can check the reasons why the Email Security system decided not to deliver the email message to the user.
Messages from mail servers globally marked as a source of spam may not be
reported.
#### Locate message [#locate-message]
For each listed result, you can also use the **Locate message** function, which lets you identify the folder where the message is currently located, including the trash, or whether the message has been deleted or downloaded via the POP protocol.
The locate message function may not be available if the recipient's mailbox has configured external message forwarding.
### Sent mail [#sent-mail]
By selecting **sent mail**, you can view all email sent from the specified domain or account and determine, in real time, whether a message that has just been sent has already been delivered or is still queued.
**Sent mail** also reports any messages blocked by Qboxmail's Email Security antispam and antivirus system. Sending these messages is blocked to prevent the spread of unwanted or risky material and to maintain the high reputation of our SMTP sending systems.
For each result, various information is shown, including sender and recipient, subject and message size, and the server and port used for sending. Email is divided into *delivered*, *rejected*, *queued on the recipient server*.
### PDF report [#pdf-report]
The PDF Report function lets you generate a document containing all the detailed information for individual Accesses, Received Mail, and Sent Mail results, which can be sent to Qboxmail technical support or shared with customers and IT contacts.
Tracemail is a tool designed and created by the Qboxmail research and
development team. Its implementation complies with GDPR policies, thereby
protecting users' privacy.
For more details about
[Tracemail](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/tracemail/), visit the
Qboxmail website.
# Backup and recovery (/en/guides/email-hosting/mtm/backup-recovery)
## Backup [#backup]
A backup is a reserve copy of data created to avoid unpleasant situations in the event of data loss caused by human error or another type of incident. In our case, backups are performed on users' email accounts to prevent one or more messages from being lost after being deleted by the user, whether by mistake or otherwise. Our systems automatically back up all email accounts every day at midnight and keep them available to the user **in read-only mode** **for 15 days** through [Mail Time Machine](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/mail-time-machine/mail-time-machine).
Backups are a “snapshot” of the data on our servers for an email mailbox at a specific point in time. If your email account is configured with POP3 and you delete messages, they cannot be recovered because they are not on the server and the backup would be empty. Conversely, if your account is configured with IMAP, the messages will be on the server and it will be possible to recover them.
### Recovery [#recovery]
Through Mail Time Machine you can restore messages from a mailbox. To recover
calendars or address books, contact our technical support.
Thanks to the backups performed every day, it is possible to restore one or more messages that were deleted by mistake. Backups do not guarantee that recovery is always possible. For example, email messages received and deleted between one backup window and the next will not be present, and messages deleted by a user configured with POP3 without leaving a copy of the messages on the server will not be present.
You can choose between 2 types of recovery:
* **Download individual messages** Downloading lets you keep the selected messages in EML format on your device. From Mail TM, you can download individual messages independently. To do this, access Mail Time Machine, find the message to download, right-click it, and then click *Download*.
* **Restore messages to the email account** If you have mistakenly deleted multiple messages, entire folders, or all mail from an email account, you can request a restore to one of the 15 days before today's date. With a restore, deleted messages will become available and visible again in the email account.\
To request a restore, access Mail Time Machine, select the date corresponding to the backup you want to restore, and click the *Request restore* button. The admin will receive an email with the restore request and an invitation to confirm or reject the operation. To reject or confirm the operation, access the panel as admin, click Restore requests, and choose whether to Confirm or Reject the request.
> Each backup is retained for 15 days. A restore can only be confirmed within the time limits shown in the panel.
If the request is accepted, the operation will be performed immediately and the user will receive a confirmation email when it is complete.
The restore operation adds the missing messages to the email mailbox; existing
messages remain available. In practice, only the missing messages are added.
If the request is rejected, the user will receive an email rejecting the operation.
The operation has an extra cost, which will be billed as soon as we receive
confirmation of the operation.
# Introduction to Mail Time Machine (/en/guides/email-hosting/mtm/mail-time-machine-introduction)
### Mail Time Machine [#mail-time-machine]
Mail Time Machine is a tool that lets you access backups of an email account from today back **up to 15 days**.
You can access Mail Time Machine (MTM) at [https://mtm.qboxmail.com/](https://mtm.qboxmail.com/) by entering the email account login credentials and selecting the day for which you want to view the backup. Once you have logged in, you will see an interface that is completely identical to Webmail, but with limited functionality because backups are available in read-only mode.
In MTM, all personal folders are shown, both subscribed and unsubscribed.
Backups are performed using Snapshot technology at midnight every day and therefore contain all messages from all folders that were present in the user's mailbox on our servers at that specific moment.
### Features [#features]
Through MTM you can:
* view the emails included in the backup
* view the source of a message
* download individual email messages in EML format
* request a restore
To download a message, right-click the message and then click *Download*. To recover multiple messages, please read the documentation about [recovery](https://docs.qboxmail.com/it/mail-time-machine/backup#recupero).
Backups are read-only and it is not possible to delete or modify their content. Backups are a “*snapshot*” of the data on our servers for a single mailbox at a specific point in time. If your email account is configured in POP3 without keeping a copy of messages on our server, it will not be possible to recover messages deleted by mistake because there is no trace of them on the server, so the backup would be empty. Conversely, if you are configured in POP3 with a copy of messages kept on the server or in IMAP, the messages will be present on the server and it will be possible to recover them.
Discover all the features of [Mail Time
Machine](https://www.qboxmail.it/caratteristiche/mail-time-machine/) on the
Qboxmail website.
# Access (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/access)
### **Log in** [#log-in]
To use Webmail, all you need is a computer or smartphone and an internet connection.
Enter [https://webmail.qboxmail.com](https://webmail.qboxmail.com) in your browser’s address bar and log in with your credentials.
If you have enabled two-factor authentication (2FA), you will be asked to
enter an additional OTP code.
On your **first login**, a short guided procedure will help you complete your profile by confirming or changing the details entered when the account was created (first name, last name, etc.) and, if you want, adding a photo to your profile.
By clicking the `Save` button, you will access Webmail and can start communicating using the available tools.
### **Logout** [#logout]
To log out of Webmail, click your avatar at the top right of the navigation bar, then click the `Logout` button in the menu.
# Account settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/account-settings)
Account settings let you manage information related to your user and the security of the account you use to access Webmail.
To edit the settings, click settings at the bottom left of the sidebar and select the corresponding item in the side menu for the settings you want to change.
## **Profile** [#profile]
This section is dedicated to the contact information and account preferences used to access Webmail.
### **Personal information** [#personal-information]
Set an image for your profile, which will be shown to all your contacts.
To add or edit your profile image, click the `Edit` button. A modal window will open where you can:
* take a photo using the button;
* select an image from your device using the button.
After uploading the image, you can choose the zoom level using the slider below the photo and rotate it using the button.
If you want to use a default image, click the `Use default image` button.
In this section, you can also edit the information related to your user that will be shown to your contacts.
### **General settings** [#general-settings]
In this section, you can set the default language, time zone, time format, and date format for your Webmail interface.
The currently available languages are:
* Italian 🇮🇹
* English 🇬🇧
* Dutch 🇳🇱
* Swedish 🇸🇪
* Portuguese 🇵🇹
* Spanish 🇪🇸
* German 🇩🇪
* French 🇫🇷
* Greek 🇬🇷
* Serbian 🇷🇸
* Danish 🇩🇰
## **Security** [#security]
Section dedicated to the security settings for the account you use to access Webmail.
### **Password expiration** [#password-expiration]
If automatic password expiration is active for your email account, this section shows the expiration date and the number of days remaining until that date.
### **Change password** [#change-password]
To set a new password, open the *Security* section of the settings and click the `Change password` button.
A modal will open asking you to enter your current password, then type a new password, confirm it a second time, and click the `Save` button.
Clicking the `Generate random password` button creates a random password that you can copy using the button.
### **OTP authentication** [#otp-authentication]
**Enable OTP authentication**
To enable two-factor authentication, open the *Security* section of the settings, click the `Enable OTP` button, scan the activation QR Code shown in the window using an authentication app on your smartphone, and enter the numeric code generated by the app before the time expires.
Click `Confirm` to complete the operation.
To use two-factor authentication (2FA), install Google Authenticator or any
other OTP authentication app available on Google Play or the Apple Store on
your smartphone.
**Disable OTP authentication**
To disable two-factor authentication, open the *Security* section of the settings, click the `Disable OTP` button, and enter the numeric code generated by the app before the time expires.
If access through two-factor authentication has been made mandatory by the
domain administrator, you will not be able to permanently disable this
security policy. You will be asked to enable it again at the next login.
## **Notifications** [#notifications]
Section dedicated to enabling or disabling Webmail browser notifications.
### **When are notifications sent?** [#when-are-notifications-sent]
Notifications, if enabled, are sent when you receive a new message or as a reminder for a calendar event:
* if your browser is open with Webmail open
* if your browser is hidden with Webmail open
* if your browser is open even without the Webmail window open
If you do not want to receive notifications while your browser is open, log
out of Webmail. At the moment, notifications are sent only when a new message
is delivered to Inbox (INBOX).
### **How do I enable notifications?** [#how-do-i-enable-notifications]
* **If you already use Webmail**, enable the *Enable browser notifications* checkbox.
After changing this setting, allow notifications from [webmail.qboxmail.com](https://webmail.qboxmail.com).
Finally, make sure your browser has saved the permission, usually by clicking the lock icon in the address bar.
* **If this is your first Webmail login**, enter your credentials and complete the initial settings save steps.
Once you are inside your email account, the browser will ask you to allow notifications from [webmail.qboxmail.com](https://webmail.qboxmail.com).
Allow them and make sure browser notifications are enabled in the settings.
## **Integrations** [#integrations]
This section contains integrations with third-party services offered to extend the features available in your Webmail.
### **Zoom** [#zoom]
Save time when scheduling your events by inviting participants and adding the details of a Zoom video meeting to an event.
The Zoom integration lets you schedule video meetings directly by creating an event in the Webmail Calendar.
This way, event participants immediately receive the link to join the video meeting on Zoom. The link is connected to your Zoom account and generated automatically.
The Zoom integration is available only for Professional and Enterprise plans.
#### **How to enable the Zoom integration** [#how-to-enable-the-zoom-integration]
To enable the Zoom integration:
Go to [https://zoom.us/signin](https://zoom.us/signin) and create a Zoom account with the plan you
prefer. If you already have a Zoom account, you do not need to create a new
one.
Open your Webmail settings and enable the integration by clicking the
`Configure` button in the box for the Zoom service.
You will be redirected to the Zoom login page. Sign in with the account you
created previously, or with the account you prefer, to enable the
integration.
The integration works with any plan provided by the Zoom platform, including
the free plan.
Once configuration is complete, Zoom will appear among the available locations when creating a new event in Calendar.
#### **How to use the Zoom integration** [#how-to-use-the-zoom-integration]
To automatically add a Zoom link to an event, making it available to all invited participants:
Create an event by following the steps described on the [View and manage
events](link) page.
Invite the desired participants.
Select Zoom among the available locations.
Save the event.
After saving the event, all participants will see the link to join your video meeting on the platform.
#### **How to disable the Zoom integration** [#how-to-disable-the-zoom-integration]
To disable the Zoom integration, open your Webmail settings and disable the integration by clicking the `Disable` button in the box for the Zoom service.
Once disabled, Zoom will no longer appear among the available locations for an event.
#### **How to uninstall the application from your Zoom account** [#how-to-uninstall-the-application-from-your-zoom-account]
Log in to your Zoom account and go to the Zoom Marketplace section.
Click Manage > Installed Apps or search for the Video Meeting for Qboxmail app.
Click the Video Meeting for Qboxmail app.
Click `Uninstall`.
Go to the [Zoom Marketplace](https://marketplace.zoom.us/) website and log
in to your profile.
Click the `Manage` button in the navbar. You will find a sidebar where you
need to open the `Added App` page, which shows the list of installed
applications.
Click the **Video Meeting for Qboxmail** app and scroll until you find the
`Remove app` button, or click and
then `Remove` in the dropdown menu.
## **Parameters** [#parameters]
In this section, you can view the parameters needed to configure your preferred devices or clients to receive and send email with your account.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/address-book-introduction)
Address Book is the module that lets you view, manage, and share all your personal or company contacts, organizing them according to your preferences.
To manage your contacts, click the
icon in the navigation sidebar.
# Address book settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/address-book-settings)
### Display [#display]
Set your preferred contact display and sorting mode by choosing which address book to use as the default when
you add a new contact.
To change this setting, access the settings by clicking
and go to the *Contact display* page. Here you can choose:
* Initial address book, i.e. the address book displayed automatically when opening the Address Book section
* Default address book, the address book where newly created contacts are saved.
* Contact sorting
* Your preferred data display.
Once you have made the desired changes, click the `Save` button at the top right to complete the operation.
### Address books [#address-books]
Organize and manage your personal address books and the address books shared with you by other users.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| -------------------------------- | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | activeSync | By enabling synchronization through the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, you can view and edit the address book from all devices and email clients that support this protocol. |
| | Share | Share an Address Book. |
| | Edit | Edit an Address Book. |
| | Delete | Delete an Address Book. |
#### Personal address books [#personal-address-books]
To create, edit, or delete an address book, access the settings by clicking
and select *Address books* in the sidebar.
To create a personal address book, click `New address book`, enter the name of the address book you want to create, and click the `Save` button to add it to the list
of address books displayed in the sidebar of the Address Book module.
To enable Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync synchronization for the new address book, turn on the switch labeled *Sync with Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync*.
You can also create a new personal address book by clicking the `+ Address
book` button directly in the sidebar of the Address Book module.
To edit a personal address book, click edit next to the address book you want to edit, make your changes, and click the `Save` button to confirm.
You can also edit a personal address book by right-clicking the address book
name in the sidebar of the Address Book module and selecting *Rename*.
To enable/disable Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync synchronization for a personal address book, go to the Address Book module.
Right-click the address book name, select ActiveSync and then Sync/Do not sync.
You can also enable or disable synchronization in the *Address books* section in the settings by clicking edit
on the relevant address book.
On the default Address Book, synchronization with Microsoft® Exchange
ActiveSync cannot be disabled and is available only for domains with a
Professional or Enterprise plan.
To delete a personal address book, click the trash icon
next to the address book you want to delete and confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button.
You can also delete a personal address book, except for the default one, by
right-clicking the address book name in the sidebar of the Address Book module
and selecting *Delete*.
#### Automatic contact saving [#automatic-contact-saving]
Set up automatic saving for all contacts that are not already in your personal or company address books and choose which address book to add them to.
To set up automatic contact saving, access the settings by clicking
and select *Address books* in the sidebar.
To enable automatic contact saving, turn on the *Automatically save email recipients not in the address book* option and select the address book where contacts should be saved.
Click `Save` to complete the changes.
#### Shared address books [#shared-address-books]
Shared address books are address books that other users in your same domain have shared with you, assigning you specific read or write permissions.
To share a personal address book, go to the *Address books* section in the settings, click edit
next to the address book you want to share, move to the *Address book sharing* tab, enter the name or email address of the user you want to share the address book with, and select them from the suggested results.
Before saving, click Edit next to the selected user to assign address book management permissions. Click the `Save` button to confirm the operation.
To stop sharing, click the trash icon
next to the user you want to remove from the sharing list.
To subscribe/unsubscribe to a shared address book, enter the name or email address of the address book owner.
Select the owner, expand the entry, and click the Subscribe / Unsubscribe button next to the name of the address book you want to subscribe/unsubscribe to.
To subscribe to an address book, the user who owns the address book must share
it and make it available for subscription.
You can also share a personal address book by right-clicking the address book
name in the sidebar of the Address Book module and selecting *Share*.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/calendar-introduction)
Calendar is the module that lets you view, manage, and share all your appointments and events, organizing them according to your preferences.
To manage your events, click the calendar in the navigation sidebar.
The Calendar module is available only for domains with a Professional or
Enterprise plan.
# Calendar settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/calendar-settings)
Calendar settings let you manage your preferences for viewing and organizing your events.
To change this setting, open settings by clicking
and select the corresponding item for the settings you want to change in the sidebar, under Calendar.
### Display [#display]
Set your preferred event display and sorting mode by choosing which calendar to use as the default.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Default calendar | Default calendar for new events. |
| Default view | Default calendar view. You can choose between year, month, week, work week, day, and list. |
| Week start | Default day for the start of the week. |
| Time slot division | Default display for time slot division. |
| Start of working day | Start time of the working day. |
| End of working day | End time of the working day. |
| Show week numbers | Shows week numbers in the calendar view. |
| Show as busy outside working hours | Always shows you as busy outside working hours by default. |
### Calendars [#calendars]
Organize and manage your personal calendars and shared calendars associated with your account.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ----------------------------------- | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Enable ActiveSync | By enabling synchronization through the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, you can view and edit a Calendar from all devices and email clients that support this protocol. |
| | Disable ActiveSync | Disables synchronization through the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol. |
| | Share | Share a Calendar. |
| | Edit | Edit a Calendar. |
| | Delete | Delete a Calendar. |
#### Personal calendars [#personal-calendars]
Personal calendars are useful calendars for organizing your events more effectively.
To create, edit, or delete a personal calendar, open settings by clicking
and select *Calendars* in the sidebar.
To create a personal calendar, enter the name of the calendar you want to create and click the `+` button
to add it to the list of calendars displayed in the Calendar module sidebar.
You can also create a new personal calendar by clicking the `+ Calendar`
button in the Calendar module sidebar.
To edit a personal calendar, click edit
next to the calendar you want to edit, make your changes, and click the `Save` button to confirm.
You can also edit a personal calendar by right-clicking the calendar name in
the Calendar module sidebar and selecting Edit.
To enable Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync synchronization for a personal calendar, click the toggle under the ActiveSync column next to the calendar you want to synchronize.
By enabling synchronization through the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync protocol, you can view and edit the calendar from all
devices and email clients that support this protocol.
Access to the Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync service is available only for
domains with an Enterprise plan and cannot be disabled on the default
calendar.
To disable Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync synchronization for a personal calendar, turn off the switch under the ActiveSync column
next to the calendar you no longer want to synchronize.
To share a personal calendar, click share next to the calendar you want to share,
enter the name or email address of the user you want to share the calendar with, and assign them calendar management permissions.
Click the `Save` button to confirm the operation.
You can also share a personal calendar by right-clicking the calendar name in
the Calendar module sidebar and selecting *Share*.
To delete a personal calendar, click the trash icon
next to the calendar you want to delete and confirm the operation by clicking the `Delete` button.
You can also delete a personal calendar by right-clicking the calendar name in
the Calendar module sidebar and selecting *Delete*.
#### Holiday calendars [#holiday-calendars]
Holiday calendars let you add or delete one or more holiday calendars based on the selected country.
You can add one or more holiday calendars by selecting the country/countries and clicking `+`.
You can delete a holiday calendar by clicking the trash icon
for the calendar you want to delete.
#### Shared calendars [#shared-calendars]
Shared calendars are calendars that other users have shared with you, assigning you specific read or write permissions.
To create, edit, or delete a personal calendar, open settings by clicking
and select *Calendars* in the sidebar.
To subscribe to a shared calendar, enter the name or email address of the owner of the calendar you want to add.
When the contact appears in the search results, click the corresponding card to open it. The list of calendars available
for subscription will be displayed: find the one you are interested in and click the `Subscribe` button to add it to your calendars.
To subscribe to a calendar, the user who owns the calendar must share it and
make it available for subscription.
To delete a subscription to a shared calendar, click the trash icon next to the calendar you
want to unsubscribe from.
#### Remote calendars [#remote-calendars]
Remote calendars let you view your external calendars compatible with the iCal format (.ics files) in Webmail.
To add a remote calendar in Webmail, you must first get the iCal link from your external calendar.
Once you have it, copy it and access Webmail. Click the calendar
in the sidebar and select `+ Remote calendar`.
At this point, a window will open where you can paste the iCal link you copied earlier. After pasting it into the Web address (URL) field,
click `OK` to complete the operation.
An iCal link is a web address that provides access to a calendar in iCalendar
format (.ics file). This standard format is compatible with most calendar
applications and is used to share or synchronize events and appointments
across different platforms.
### Steps to retrieve an iCal link [#steps-to-retrieve-an-ical-link]
#### Google Calendar [#google-calendar]
Access Google Calendar.
In the left sidebar, find the calendar you want to share.
Click the three dots next to the calendar name and select Settings and
sharing.
Scroll to the Integrate calendar section.
Copy the link under Secret address in iCal format.
If the calendar is not public, make sure to use the secret iCal address to
allow access.
#### Microsoft 365 [#microsoft-365]
Sign in to your account on Outlook or through the Office 365 app.
Go to the Calendar section.
Right-click the calendar you want to share and select Share.
Scroll to the Integrate calendar section.
In the window that opens, choose the option to generate a shareable link.
Copy the provided iCal link.
Sharing settings may vary depending on the permissions configured by the
administrator.
#### Apple iCloud [#apple-icloud]
Access iCloud Web
Go to the Calendar section and click the Calendar icon to view your iCloud
calendars.
Select the calendar to share.
Enable public sharing by selecting the Public Calendar option (or Publish
Calendar, depending on the interface). A link will be generated for you to
copy and paste.
Copy the link shown under Public URL (it usually starts with `webcal://`)
and click save.
Access your Webmail, go to the Calendars section, and click remote
calendar. Paste the copied link, replace `webcal` with `https` at the
beginning of the link, and save.
The remote calendar is read-only, so you cannot edit events directly from Webmail. Once connected,
the remote calendar will update automatically whenever changes are made on the original platform. You can distinguish remote calendars
from other calendar events by customizing them with different names and colors.
To edit a remote calendar, click edit
next to the calendar you want to edit, make your changes, and click the `Save` button to confirm.
To share a personal calendar, click share
next to the calendar you want to share, copy the generated link, and share it by sending the URL in read-only mode.
To delete a remote calendar, click the trash icon
next to the calendar you want to delete and confirm the operation with the `Delete` button.
### Events [#events]
Set the default options for all your new events.
| Field | Description |
| --------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| New event type | Default type for all new events. |
| Show new event availability | Default availability for all new events. |
| New event alert | Default alert time for all new events. |
| All-day new event alert | Default alert time for all new events that last the entire day. |
#### Alerts [#alerts]
Manage your alert preferences for all calendars, if a specific default value is not set.
Through the available forms, you can decide when to receive reminder notifications for the events in your calendar.
#### Personal meeting room [#personal-meeting-room]
Generate a room in your online meeting application and enter the link here.
It can then be selected as the 'Location' when creating an event.
The link will be automatically entered as the location when creating a new event.
### Event invitations [#event-invitations]
Choose whether to enable event invitations only for specific users.
To enable this setting, turn on the switch next to Prevent invitations and appointments and enter the name or email address of the users authorized to send you event invitations and appointments.
The added users will be displayed in a list with their name and email address.
To remove an authorization and prevent a user from sending you further participation requests, click the Delete icon
next to the desired contact.
### Calendar labels [#calendar-labels]
Labels are markers made up of a name and a color that you can associate with one or more events to better organize your calendars.
By clicking the label name in the Calendar module sidebar, you can view all marked events in the selected
calendars.
To change this setting, open settings by clicking
and select *Labels* in the sidebar, under Calendar.
To create a label, click `New label`, enter the name you want to assign to it, choose the color, and decide whether to display the label even when the sidebar is closed.
After making your changes, click `Save` to complete the operation.
The list of all created labels will be displayed.
You can also create a label by clicking the `+ Label` button in the Calendar
module sidebar.
To edit a label, click edit
next to the label you want to edit, make your changes, and click the `Save` button to confirm.
To delete a label, click the trash icon
next to the label you want to delete.
You can also delete a label by right-clicking the label name in the Calendar
module sidebar.
# Contact lists (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/contact-lists)
### Lists [#lists]
A list is a group of contacts you can send email messages to without having to enter recipients one by one.
When composing a message, you can insert a list directly by typing the list name in the recipient field.
If you enter the list, the email addresses of all members belonging to that list will automatically appear.
Another action you can perform with a contact list is to share it by sending it as an email attachment.
#### Create a list [#create-a-list]
Lists are closely linked to address books: you can add only contacts belonging to the same address book to a list.
You cannot add contacts from different address books to lists.
To create a list, go to the Address Book section, open the address book that contains the contacts you want to add
to the list and, in the right-hand section, go to Lists and click `+ New list`.
Choose a name for the list you want to create and add contacts by typing their name or email address in the *Add members* field.
You can add up to **150 contacts** for each list you create, and you can remove or add contacts to your list at any time.
Finally, click `Save` to continue.
You can find your list inside the relevant address book, in the dedicated section.
You cannot create lists in the Automatic company address book. To create
a list with company contacts, we recommend creating/adding them in
another address book and then creating a list.
#### Manage a list [#manage-a-list]
You can manage your lists by going to the Address Book section. Select the address book that contains the list you want to manage, then open the
Lists section and choose the list you are interested in to view its details and change its settings.
The actions you can perform are:
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ------------------------------ | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Write email | Write an email to all contacts in the list. Clicking the icon will open the message composition window directly. |
| | Share | Share the list contacts with another person. Sharing takes place through a VCF file attached to an email. |
| | Edit | Edit the list: you can change its name and the contacts it contains. |
| | Delete | Delete the list. |
| | View vCard | View the list file in VCard format. |
| | Download vCard | Download the list file in VCard format. |
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/mail-introduction)
Mail is the module that lets you view and manage your email, organizing incoming and outgoing messages according to your preferences.
Mail lets you organize emails by dividing them into Folders, assigning Labels, or sharing them with your colleagues.
To manage your email, click the button in the navigation sidebar.
# Mail settings (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/mail-settings)
Mail settings let you manage your preferences for displaying and organizing your email messages.
To edit the settings, click settings
at the bottom left of the sidebar and select the corresponding item in the side menu for the settings you want to change.
### Display [#display]
#### Layout [#layout]
Set your preferred display mode by choosing from:
* three-column view
* view with message preview
* list view
#### Reading settings [#reading-settings]
Set your message reading preferences by deciding whether to enable or disable email grouping by conversation, show or hide the priority of received messages, enable or disable read receipt requests, and automatically load images contained in messages.
### Folders [#folders]
#### Folders [#folders-1]
In this section, you will find all default and personal folders.
Default folders (INBOX, Sent, Drafts, Trash) cannot be renamed or deleted.
For each folder, the **name**, the **number of read and unread messages** inside it, and the **actions** that can be performed on the folder are shown.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Edit | Edit the folder path and name. Allows you to subscribe to a folder, making it visible. |
| | Delete | Delete |
| | Hide / Make visible | Make the folder visible or hide it using the checkbox. When active, the folder is visible in the list of available folders. |
By clicking , you can edit the settings of a specific folder, such as:
* enabling or disabling subscription, which lets you show or hide the folder in the Mail section sidebar;
* the folder or subfolder path;
* the folder or subfolder name;
* setting a time interval after which messages are automatically deleted.
You can select one of the following time intervals:
* 1 month
* 3 months
* 6 months
* 1 year
* 2 years
* 3 years
* 4 years
* 5 years
If you enable automatic cleanup for a folder, all messages older than the
selected time interval will be permanently deleted.
#### Default folders [#default-folders]
Default folders are system folders present in every email account where, unless otherwise specified, messages are automatically sorted.
| Icon | Folder | Description |
| ------------------------------------------------ | ------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Inbox | Contains incoming messages. |
| | Drafts | Contains messages saved as drafts and not yet sent. |
| | Sent | Contains outgoing messages. |
| | Spam | Contains messages classified or marked as spam. |
| | Trash | Contains messages you have deleted. |
| | Archive | Contains messages you have archived with the dedicated button. |
Messages in the Spam and Trash folders are permanently and automatically
deleted 30 days after the date they were received or deleted.
#### Personal folders [#personal-folders]
Personal folders are non-default folders, useful for organizing your email messages more effectively.
To create, edit, subscribe to, or delete a personal folder, click settings at the bottom left of the navigation bar
and select **Folders** in the **Mail** section of the sidebar.
To create a personal folder, click the New folder button, select the path (parent folder) where you want to create the folder, assign it a name, and click `Save` to confirm the operation.
The folder will automatically appear in the list of folders and in the Mail module sidebar.
You can also create a new personal folder by clicking the `+ Folder` button in
the Mail module sidebar.
To delete a personal folder, click the trash icon next to the folder you want to delete and confirm by clicking `Delete`.
#### Shared folders [#shared-folders]
In this section, you will find all folders that have been shared with you.
For each folder, the **name**, the **number of read and unread messages** inside it, and the **button to enable or disable** subscription are shown. Subscription lets you show or hide the folder in the Mail section sidebar.
To share a personal folder, click next to the folder you want to share, open the *Sharing* tab, and enter the name or
email address of the user you want to share the folder with. Add the user to the list and assign the related folder management permissions. Click `Save` to confirm the operation.
### Composition [#composition]
#### Read / delivery confirmation [#read--delivery-confirmation]
By clicking the *Always request read receipt* selector, you can automatically request a read receipt from the recipients of all your messages and receive an automatic notification message if the recipient confirms it.
Read receipts are at the recipient's discretion.
By clicking the *Always request delivery confirmation* selector, you will set an automatic notification for the successful delivery of all messages you send to the remote server.
Delivery notification does not guarantee that the message has been seen or
read by the recipient.
#### Undo email sending [#undo-email-sending]
Lets you select the number of seconds during which you can undo sending an email. The available options are listed below and can be set only for domains with Professional and Enterprise plans:
* 5 seconds
* 10 seconds
* 20 seconds
* 30 seconds
* disabled
### Toolbar [#toolbar]
To configure the toolbar that best suits your needs, open the *Composition* page in the settings and scroll down to the dedicated section.
Choose the toolbar from the following available options:
* **Default toolbar**: includes all available tools and is the configuration shown by default to every user. Clicking the up arrow icon on the right opens the second row of tools.
* **Essential toolbar**: an essential toolbar containing only the main tools, such as bold, italic, bulleted list, numbered list, insert link, and clear formatting.
* **No toolbar**: in this mode, no clickable tools are available. You can write text without changing the style through the interface, using only keyboard shortcuts.
* **Customizable toolbar**: lets you create a custom toolbar. Selecting this option opens a modal where you can build the toolbar by dragging the available tools into an empty bar, choosing which ones to include and defining their order.
You can also click Start from the Default toolbar to customize the toolbar starting from the default configuration.
By enabling the Enable second row toggle, the toolbar can be expanded to two rows, letting you add more tools and better organize the available space. Clicking the Restart button clears the toolbar created so far and lets you start again. To make changes to a custom toolbar that has already been saved, click the Customize button to open the related window.
#### How to choose the toolbar [#how-to-choose-the-toolbar]
Each toolbar includes:
* a selection **radio button**
* the **name**
* a **short description**
* a **preview**
Select the desired toolbar using the radio button and confirm your choice by clicking `Save` at the top right.
The selected toolbar will **automatically replace the one currently in use** in the message composition window.
### Email templates [#email-templates]
Email templates make it easier to compose recurring emails by saving templates that you can choose when composing a message.
#### Create an email template [#create-an-email-template]
Go to *Email templates*. By clicking the New `email` template button, you can set up a new message to save as a default template.
You need to specify:
* Name: useful for identifying the message among the other saved messages. It will not be part of the email when sent.
* Identity: select from the proposed list the address from which you want the template to be sent. If a signature has been configured for the selected identity, it will automatically be added at the end of the message.
* The message subject.
* The message text.
* You can also add attachments.
After saving at least one template, when composing a new email message you can click
Email templates at the bottom of the message composition window and
choose the message you want to send from the displayed list.
Each message setting
(identity, subject, text, attachments) can be changed before sending the message.
#### Email template settings by plan [#email-template-settings-by-plan]
Depending on the plan you are subscribed to, you can set templates with the following limits:
| | Basic | Professional | Enterprise |
| -------------------------------------- | ----- | ------------ | ---------- |
| Number of configurable email templates | 5 | 20 | 50 |
| Maximum number of attachments | 5 | 10 | 10 |
| Maximum message size (MB) | 5 | 10 | 10 |
### Signatures and identities [#signatures-and-identities]
Set a custom signature for the different identities of your account. It will be automatically added at the bottom of all your new messages.
Identities are generated automatically based on the domain and mailbox aliases
configured on your domain. They include the primary address, aliases, and any
automatic forwards associated with the mailbox.
For each signature, you will find the display name, the identity associated with the signature, and the actions that can be performed for each signature.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ---------------------------------------- | ------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Edit | Edit the signature settings. |
| | Delete | Delete |
| | Bcc | Lets you quickly understand whether the *Add sender in Bcc* setting is active on the signature. |
To add a signature, click `New signature`, select the identity you want to associate it with, enter the display name and the signature body, and then click `Save`.
In the signature body, you can also insert HTML code, for example your company logo or a link to a website.
Among the settings associated with a signature, you can enable or disable the following using toggles:
* automatically *Add sender in Bcc*, especially useful when managing mailboxes with active forwards or in the case of Email Aliases or Domain Aliases.
* Do not add signature to replies
If the `New signature` button is not present, it means you have no identities
for which to create a signature.
#### Default senders [#default-senders]
In the *Signatures and identities* section, you will find the settings related to *Default senders*. Here, you can select the identity to use as the default sender for new messages and the one to use automatically when replying to received emails. Both settings can be changed at any time from the composition window.
It is always possible to change the sender directly while writing the message.
### Labels [#labels]
To create a new label, open the *Labels* section in the settings. The list of existing labels will be displayed.
Click the `New label` button, enter the name you want to assign to it and the reference color. You can choose whether to pin the label when the sidebar is collapsed.
After entering all required values, click `Save`.
You can also create a label by clicking the `+ Label` button in the Mail
module sidebar.
To edit an existing label, click edit next to the label you want to edit,
edit the label and click `Save` to update the label list.
To pin a label in the Mail module sidebar, making it visible even in compact mode, click edit , enable the *Pin the label when the sidebar is closed* switch, and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
To delete an existing label, click the trash icon next to the label you want to delete and save the changes by clicking Save at the top right.
Labels can be applied automatically to received messages by creating a rule.
To associate a label with an email message, click and open the message you want to associate the label with, click more , select *Label*, and click the label you want to associate.
Up to 4 labels can be associated with a single email message.
### Autoresponder [#autoresponder]
Set an automatic reply to all messages received by your account by entering the message subject and text.
You can select the time interval, specifying the start and end date and time during which the automatic reply will be active, so that it activates and deactivates automatically on the date you choose.
To activate the changes, click the *Enable autoresponder* toggle. At this point, all fields will be enabled and you can proceed with creating the message. Once the changes are complete, click `Save` at the top right.
The automatic reply message is sent to a specific sender only once within a
24-hour period.
### Forward messages [#forward-messages]
Set one or more addresses to which all messages received by your account should be automatically forwarded.
To add a forwarding address, enter the email address to which you want to forward messages, click the `+` button to add the address to the recipients list, and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
To delete an existing forwarding address, click the trash icon next to the address you want to delete and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
To keep a local copy of all forwarded messages, enable the corresponding option.
You can enter up to 20 forwarding addresses.
### Antispam exceptions [#antispam-exceptions]
Set your antispam rules by choosing the addresses from which you always want to receive messages (Allowed senders) and those from which you never want to receive them (Blocked senders).
The sensitivity of the Antispam filter can be changed for the entire domain
from its settings in the Control Panel.
Never add your own domains to these lists, as this would expose you to
possible email fraud.
#### Allowed senders [#allowed-senders]
The Allowed senders list is a list of email addresses or domains that you consider trusted and from which you always want to receive messages, without those messages being analyzed by the antispam filter.
To add an email address or domain, enter it in the dedicated field and click the `+` button. The item will be added to the corresponding list.
To remove an email address or domain from the list, click the trash icon next to the address you want to remove from the list.
If you access Webmail as Postmaster and add a domain or email account to the
Allowed senders list, the settings will apply to all mailboxes in the domain.
#### Blocked senders [#blocked-senders]
The Blocked senders list is a list of email addresses or domains that you consider untrusted and believe should be blocked, so that messages attempting to reach you are always rejected by the antispam filter.
To add an email address or domain to the list, enter the email address or domain you want to add and click the `+` button.
When you add an email address / domain to the Blocked senders list, all
messages from it will be automatically blocked and returned to the sender.
To remove an email address or domain from the list, click the trash icon next to the address you want to remove from the list.
If you access Webmail as Postmaster and add a domain or email account to the
Allowed senders list, the settings will apply to all mailboxes in the domain.
### Rules [#rules]
Set specific rules for your incoming messages and better organize your mail.
Rules are a very powerful tool. They let you sort or perform other actions on the emails you receive directly on the server side as soon as they arrive. This means that actions are performed regardless of whether you are connected to Webmail.
To add a rule, click `New rule`, assign a name to the rule you want to add, specify the parameters to assign by choosing from the available options, click `Save` to add it to the list of existing rules, and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
To edit an existing filter, click edit next to the rule you want to edit, make the desired changes, click `Save` to update the filter list, and save the changes by clicking Save at the top right.
You can change the order in which messages are processed. To do this, click
Reorder and move the desired filters. When finished, click Finish reorder and
then `Save`.
To disable an existing rule, turn off the related switch and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
To delete an existing rule, click the trash icon
next to the rule you want to delete and save the changes by clicking `Save` at the top right.
#### Available parameters [#available-parameters]
| Parameters | Desired value |
| ------------ | --------------------- |
| Subject | Message subject |
| Sender | Message sender |
| Recipient | Message recipient |
| Cc | Message Cc recipients |
| Message | Message details |
| Body | Message body |
| Arrival date | Message arrival date |
| Size | Message size |
| Other header | Set a custom header |
You can check whether a parameter **contains** or **does not contain** a value, whether it **is equal to** or **is different from** a specific value, or whether it **exists** or **does not exist**.
The **Is equal to** and **Is not equal to** operators are recommended for expert users because they require an exact match with the field content. In most cases, it is preferable to use the **Contains** and **Does not contain** operators.
When using the **Is equal to** or **Is not equal to** operators, the entered value must exactly match all elements present in the field.
#### Available actions [#available-actions]
| Actions | Effect |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Move message to a folder | The message is moved to the selected folder |
| Copy message to a folder | The message is copied to the selected folder |
| Reject the message and send an automatic reply | The message is rejected with the entered message |
| Delete the message | The message is deleted |
| Mark the message as | The message is marked as read, deleted, replied, draft, or flagged |
| Apply a label to the message | The selected label is applied to the message |
| Redirect the message to another email address without keeping it in your folder | Redirects the message to another email address without keeping a copy. The message arrives only at the specified address and will not appear in your inbox |
| Send a copy of the message to another email address | Sends a copy of the message to another email address. One copy is delivered to your inbox and the other to the address you specified |
| Keep message in inbox | The message is kept in inbox |
| Stop processing subsequent rules | Rule processing is stopped when the condition occurs |
The rule is executed when the condition matches the configured value. The specified action is then performed.
# Read and send email (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/read-and-send-mail)
### **Read an email message** [#read-an-email-message]
To read an email message, select the folder containing the message in the sidebar and click the message you want to
read in the message list.
If the *Show messages as conversations* option is enabled:
* messages belonging to a single conversation are grouped under the most recent message;
* to show or hide the conversation content, click the number of messages shown;
* actions performed on the compact conversation affect all messages in the conversation;
* to perform an action on a single message, expand the conversation and select the message you want to act on.
### **Composition window** [#composition-window]
You can have multiple composition windows open at the same time (up to a maximum of 5) and also compose a message in full screen
in Focus mode.
The composition window can be resized and moved. Drag the edges to change its size, and drag the black top bar to move it.
By clicking **Restore window** , the window will return to its original position and size.
To minimize the window, click **Minimize window** :
minimized windows are grouped in a small box at the bottom of the page. Clicking the box displays the list of messages
that were being composed (maximum 5 messages at the same time), from which you can open the desired window.
Each section of the list shows:
* Message subject;
* Recipients (the email address is shown if the recipient is not in the address book, or the name if the contact is saved);
* Brief preview of the message.
### **Write and send a new email message** [#write-and-send-a-new-email-message]
To open the composition window for a new email message, click the `New message` button or
in the sidebar, fill in the required fields, and click the `Send` button to send the message to the addresses you entered.
To **select a different sending identity** for the message, click the contents of the *From* field and select the identity you want to use to send the message.
You can select a different sending identity only if one or more aliases have
been associated with your account.
By clicking
and dragging the email addresses, you can move them between the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.
To **manually save a draft** of the email message, click save at the bottom of the composition window or choose to
save a draft when closing the composition window.
Messages being composed are saved automatically at regular intervals.
To add one or more attachments to an email message, click the attachments icon at the bottom of the composition window and
select the files you want to attach to the message or drag them directly into the composition window.
You can attach files up to a maximum total size of 50MB.
By clicking more at the bottom of the message composition window, you can:
* specify the **priority** by clicking `High priority`;
* request a **read receipt** after the message is sent by selecting `Read receipt`;
* receive a **delivery receipt** by selecting `Delivery receipt`;
* edit a message in **plain text** mode (.txt) by selecting `Plain text mode`.
### **Reply to / forward an email message** [#reply-to--forward-an-email-message]
To reply to an email message, click the message you want to reply to and choose one of the available reply options
by clicking the corresponding icon.
When you reply to a message, Webmail automatically selects the correct
identity based on the email address that message was sent to.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| ----------------------------------------------- | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Reply | Compose a message where the To field is automatically filled in with the address of the sender you are replying to. |
| | Reply all | Compose a message where the To and Cc fields are automatically filled in with the addresses of the sender and the other recipients you are replying to. |
| | Forward | To forward an email message, click the message you want to forward and click the forward icon to open the composition window. |
| | Quick replies | Choose a predefined thank-you message from those suggested, where the To field is automatically filled in with the address of the sender you are replying to. |
### **Actions on an email message** [#actions-on-an-email-message]
To perform an action on an email message, click the message you want to perform the action on and select
the corresponding icon from the available options.
You can also perform an action on a message by right-clicking the message in
the message list and selecting the action you want to perform.
| Icon | Action | Description |
| -------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Mark | Mark the message as a favorite. |
| | Reply | Compose a message where the To field is automatically filled in with the address of the sender you are replying to. |
| | Reply all | Compose a message where the To and Cc fields are automatically filled in with the addresses of the sender and the other recipients you are replying to. |
| | Forward | To forward an email message, click the message you want to forward and click the forward icon to open the composition window. |
| | Delete | Delete the message. |
| | Quick replies | Choose a predefined thank-you message from those suggested, where the To field is automatically filled in with the address of the sender you are replying to. |
| | Create task | Create a task from the received message. |
| | Mark as Spam | Mark the message as Spam and automatically move it to the corresponding folder (Spam). |
| | Mark as Not Spam | Mark the message as Not Spam and automatically move it to the corresponding folder (Inbox). |
| | Archive | Move the message to the Archive folder. |
| | Print | Print the message. |
| | More | |
| | Mark as read | Mark the message as read. |
| | Mark as unread | Mark the message as unread. |
| | Label | Assign a label to the message. This feature is available only if at least one label has been created. |
| | Move to | Move the message to a folder. |
| | Copy to | Copy the message to a folder. |
| | Show source | View the message source code. |
| | Forward as attachment | Create a file in EML format and send it as an attachment to a new message. |
| | Edit as new | Create a new message by pre-filling the fields with those from the selected message. |
| | Download | Download the message in EML format. |
# View and manage contacts (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/view-and-manage-contacts)
### Address books [#address-books]
To view the contacts in an address book, select it in the sidebar of the Address Book module.
Address books are divided into:
| Icon | Action | Description |
| -------------------------------------- | -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| | Personal address book | Created automatically. Contains the personal contacts you have added. |
| | Company address book | Created automatically. Contains the contacts of colleagues belonging to your company, therefore all contacts in your domain. |
| | User-created address books | All address books created by the user through the `+ Address book` button. |
### Manage contacts [#manage-contacts]
To create a new contact, click the `New contact` button or
in the sidebar, fill in the required fields, and click the `Save` button to add the contact to the selected address book.
Some fields are immediately displayed in the new contact creation form.
To add more, click + Add field. These are all the available fields:
| Action | Description |
| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Avatar | Contact image. If not present, it will be automatically added by the system based on the contact’s name or the domain of the associated email address |
| Address book | Address book where the contact will be added. |
| First name | Contact’s first name. |
| Last name | Contact’s last name. |
| Company name | Contact’s company. |
| Role | Contact’s role in their company. |
| Team | Contact’s team in their company. |
| Email | Contact’s email addresses. You can enter multiple email addresses. |
| Phone | Contact’s phone numbers. You can enter multiple phone numbers. |
| Home address | Contact’s mailing addresses. You can enter only one home address. |
| Work address | Contact’s mailing addresses. You can enter only one work address. |
| Display name | Contact’s display name. |
| Nickname | Contact’s nickname. |
| Birthday | Contact’s date of birth. |
| Notes | Additional notes for the contact. |
| Personal website | Link to the contact’s personal website. |
| Work website | Link to the contact’s work website. |
To send an email to a contact, select the contact from the list and click the email icon . A new email compose window will automatically open with the selected contact as the recipient.
To share a contact, select the contact from the list and click the share icon . A new email compose window will automatically open with the contact you want to share attached.
To edit a contact, select the contact from the list, click edit ,
make your changes, and click the `Save` button to confirm.
To delete a contact, select the contact from the list, click the trash icon and click the `Delete` button to confirm.
### Importing contacts [#importing-contacts]
If you want to import contacts into Webmail, you can do so individually or in bulk through an import.
To perform an import, you must first choose the Address Book into which you
want to import. If you want to import into a new Address Book, you must create
it first.
To import contacts, follow these steps:
Go to the
*Address Book*
section in the sidebar.
Right-click the address book into which you want to import the contacts.
Select
*Import contacts*
.
Upload the vCard (.vcf) file from your device.
Click the
`Import`
button to complete the operation.
When the import is complete, the contacts contained in the file will be added to the selected address book.
Contacts can only be imported from a vCard file. A vCard file (or VCF,
Virtual Contact File) is a file with a specific format used mainly as an
electronic business card.
### Exporting contacts [#exporting-contacts]
Exporting contacts allows you to save a vCard or LDIF file containing all contacts from
a specific Address Book to your device. This file is useful for importing contacts from an old provider to a new one.
#### Exporting contacts from the previous provider [#exporting-contacts-from-the-previous-provider]
Many providers and email clients allow contacts to be exported in **vCard** format (or VCF - Virtual Contact File), a standard used for
exchanging and storing contact information.
Generally, you can export contacts by going to the **Contacts**, **Address Book**, or **Tools > Export contacts** sections,
and selecting the vCard (.vcf) format. Software that supports this feature includes, for example, Thunderbird, Roundcube, and Google Contacts.
Some providers, such as Microsoft Outlook, use different formats instead, such as **.ldif**. In these cases, you will need to convert
the exported file to **vCard** (.vcf) format before proceeding with the import. Conversion can be performed using one of the many
dedicated tools available for your operating system.
For detailed instructions on exporting contacts, consult the official documentation of the provider or application used.
#### Exporting contacts from Webmail [#exporting-contacts-from-webmail]
You can export contacts from Webmail by following these steps:
Go to the
*Address Book*
section in the sidebar.
Right-click the address book you want to export.
Select
*Export contacts*
.
Choose the desired export format.
Click
`Export`
to download the file to your device.
The supported export formats are vCard (.vcf) and LDIF (.ldif).
# View and manage events (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/view-and-manage-events)
### Events [#events]
To view the events in a calendar, enable it by selecting the corresponding checkbox in the sidebar of the Calendar module. You can change the calendar view type by selecting it from the menu in the upper right, below the navigation bar.
### Manage events [#manage-events]
To create an event, click the `New event` button or in the sidebar, fill in the required fields, and click the
`Save` button to add the event to the selected calendar.
| Field | Description |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Title | Enter the event name. |
| Select calendar | Select the calendar where you want to add the event. |
| All day | Enable or disable the all-day event. |
| Start date and time | Enter the event start date and time. |
| Event end date and time | Enter the event end date and time. |
| *Details* | |
| Event location | Enter the location where the event will take place. |
| Notes | In this section you can enter any notes about the event. |
| Label | You can select a label to assign to the event. |
| *Settings* | |
| Event type | Select the event type from: public, confidential, private. |
| Show me as | Select how you want to appear from: available, busy, away, tentative. |
| Event priority | Select the event priority from: none, high, medium, low. |
| Reminder | Select the calendar where you want to add the event. |
| Second reminder | Enable or disable the all-day event. |
| *Repeats* | |
| Repeat every | Select the event type from: public, confidential, private. |
| *Participants* | |
| Add participant | Add participants to the event and check their availability and their participation in the event. |
| *Attachments* | Select the calendar where you want to add the event. |
| Upload attachments | Upload attachment files that will be sent to the added participants. |
You can create recurring events by configuring a repetition rule when creating a new event. In the creation window, open `More options`,
select *Repetition*, choose the desired frequency, and configure the related parameters.
Once configuration is complete, click the `Save` button to save the changes and add the event to the calendar.
To invite participants to a new event, click `More options` and then *Participants* in the event creation window, enter the name or
email address of the users you want to invite, and click the `+` button to add them to the list. Click the `Save` button to save and
add the event to the calendar.
To check invitees' availability for an event, click `More options`, select *Participants* in the event creation window, add the users
to the invitee list, and click the `Check availability` button. If necessary, find an alternative time or date by clicking the
`Find availability` button and save the new date for the event by clicking the `Save proposed availability` button. Click the `Save` button to save and
add the event to the calendar.
By opening the event details, you can check whether participants have accepted
or declined the invitation, or whether they have not made a decision yet.
To add attachments to a new event, click `More options` and then *Attachments* in the event creation window, upload the files you want to attach,
and click the `Save` button to save and add the event to the calendar.
Files attached to an event can be downloaded by all participants you have
invited.
To edit an event, click the event you want to edit and click the `Details` button to open the event editing window.
Make the required changes and click the `Save` button.
To delete an event, click the event you want to edit and click the `Details` button to open the event editing window, then
click the `Delete` button and confirm the operation.
### Importing events [#importing-events]
If you want to add events to Webmail, you can do it individually or in bulk through an import.
To perform an import:
Go to the
*Calendar*
section.
Right-click the name of the calendar where you want to import the events.
Click
*Import events*
.
Upload the file in .ICS format.
Click the
`Import`
button.
Events can only be imported from a .ICS file. A file in .ICS format is a file with a specific format that
is used by various calendar and email programs to share information about appointment scheduling.
### Exporting events [#exporting-events]
Exporting events allows you to save a .ICS file containing a single event or all the events of a
Calendar to your device. This file is useful for importing events from an old provider to a new one.
#### Exporting events from the previous provider [#exporting-events-from-the-previous-provider]
Many email providers allow events to be exported in .ICS format, a file with a specific format used to transfer events and appointments.
You can export events directly in .ICS from your previous provider by going to *Calendar or Tools > Export events (in .ICS format)*.
For more information, we recommend consulting the documentation of your previous provider.
#### Exporting events from Webmail [#exporting-events-from-webmail]
You can export a **single event** from Webmail by going to *Calendar*, opening the event window, and clicking the download button
in the lower left.
You can export **all events in a calendar** by clicking *Calendar*, right-clicking the calendar you want to export, and clicking Download.
# Introduction (/en/guides/email-hosting/webmail/webmail-introduction)
Webmail is the business communication suite developed by Qboxmail that lets you read and send emails, manage and share your contacts and calendars, easily and quickly directly from the web, without having to install software or configure devices.
By accessing it from your preferred device (smartphone, tablet, or notebook), you will have everything you need, at the right time, to best manage your daily communications, both inside and outside the office.
Webmail is compatible only with the most recent operating systems and browsers
(Chrome, Firefox, Edge, and Safari) that are periodically maintained by their
developers.